DP Operator Manual

You might also like

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 336

Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Dynamic Positioning System


Operator Manual

Release 8.2

385575/D
June 2015 © Kongsberg Maritime AS
Document history
Document number: 385575
This version describes the operation of the K-Pos DP at basis
Rev. A March 2014
software release 8.2.0.
This version describes the operation of the K-Pos DP at basis
Rev. B April 2014
software release 8.2.0. Updated for Class ER.
This version describes the operation of the K-Pos DP at basis
Rev. C June 2014
software release 8.2.1.
This version describes the operation of the K-Pos DP at basis
Rev. D June 2015
software release 8.2.1. Updated missing references.

The reader
This operator manual is intended as a reference manual for the system operator. This manual is based on
the assumption that the system operator is an experienced DP operator with good understanding of basic
DP principles and general DP operation. If this is not the case, then the operator should first attend the
appropriate Kongsberg Maritime training courses.

Note
The information contained in this document remains the sole property of Kongsberg Maritime AS. No
part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means, and the information
contained within it is not to be communicated to a third party, without the prior written consent of
Kongsberg Maritime AS.
Kongsberg Maritime AS endeavours to ensure that all information in this document is correct and fairly
stated, but does not accept liability for any errors or omissions.

Warning
The equipment to which this manual applies must only be used for the purpose for which it was
designed. Improper use or maintenance may cause damage to the equipment and/or injury to personnel.
The user must be familiar with the contents of the appropriate manuals before attempting to operate
or work on the equipment.
Kongsberg Maritime disclaims any responsibility for damage or injury caused by improper installation,
use or maintenance of the equipment.

Comments
To assist us in making improvements to the product and to this manual, we welcome comments and
constructive criticism.
e-mail: km.documentation@kongsberg.com

Kongsberg Maritime AS
www.kongsberg.com
Operator Manual

Table of contents
Glossary..................................................................................................................10
K-POS DP SYSTEM THEORY ............................................. 15
The K-Pos DP system.............................................................................................15
Basic forces and motions........................................................................................15
K-Pos DP system principles ...................................................................................17
The Extended Kalman Filter ........................................................................ 17
The Controller ............................................................................................ 19
Thruster allocation ...................................................................................... 22
USER INTERFACE ............................................................ 23
Operator station ......................................................................................................23
Operator panel ........................................................................................................24
Push buttons ............................................................................................... 24
Input keypad............................................................................................... 26
Trackball.................................................................................................... 27
Joystick...................................................................................................... 27
Heading wheel............................................................................................ 27
Display layout.........................................................................................................29
Top bar....................................................................................................... 32
Dashboard layout........................................................................................ 35
Side bar...................................................................................................... 44
Working areas............................................................................................. 44
Dialog boxes .............................................................................................. 44
Display views .........................................................................................................49
Orientation of the OS and effect on display views ......................................... 49
Tooltip/hotspot cursor and change of cursor image ........................................ 49
Selecting display views and panes................................................................ 50
View control dialog boxes ........................................................................... 51
Zooming .................................................................................................... 52
Preselect dialog box .................................................................................... 52
SYSTEM SETTINGS .......................................................... 55
Changing user.........................................................................................................55
Printing the display picture.....................................................................................56
Printing system report ............................................................................................57
Adjusting the panel light ........................................................................................57
Dimming level............................................................................................ 57
Lamp test ................................................................................................... 58
Presentation Units dialog box.................................................................................59
Editing Presentation Units ........................................................................... 60

385575/D 3
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Vessel and sea current speed ........................................................................ 61


Wind, waves and sea current direction.......................................................... 61
Resetting the presentation............................................................................ 62
Set System Date/Time dialog box ..........................................................................62
Changing display colours .......................................................................................62
Changing the display palette on Operator Stations that are not set to have
an independent palette selection................................................................... 63
Changing the display palette on a single Operator Station .............................. 63
Alarm Limits dialog box ........................................................................................63
Position page .............................................................................................. 63
VRS page................................................................................................... 64
Gain dialog box ......................................................................................................65
Gain Level for High Precision and Relaxed controller mode .......................... 68
Quick model update................................................................................................68
Quick Model dialog box.............................................................................. 69
Rotation Center dialog box.....................................................................................70
JOYSTICK ....................................................................... 73
Joystick Settings dialog box ...................................................................................73
Rotation centre for joystick manoeuvring ..............................................................75
Joystick Calibrate dialog box ................................................................................77
Calibrating the joystick ............................................................................... 77
MESSAGE SYSTEM ........................................................... 79
System diagnostics .................................................................................................79
Operational checks .................................................................................................79
Audible and visual indications ..................................................................... 80
Message priority .....................................................................................................80
Presentation of messages........................................................................................81
Defining the time span for the Historic Event Page........................................ 84
Alarm states ............................................................................................................85
Acknowledging messages ......................................................................................86
Silence button............................................................................................. 87
Alarm lamps ...........................................................................................................87
Indications of errors related to the ALARMS button group ............................. 87
Messages on the printer ..........................................................................................88
Event Printer dialog box.............................................................................. 88
Message explanations — online help .....................................................................89
Operator advice messages ......................................................................................90
STARTING OPERATIONS ................................................. 92
System start-up/shut-down and OS stop/restart .....................................................92
Stop/Restart dialog box ............................................................................... 92
Restarting the system .................................................................................. 93

4 385575/D
Operator Manual

Logon Configuration dialog box ............................................................................93


Command transfer ..................................................................................................95
Taking command ........................................................................................ 95
Giving command ........................................................................................ 95
Requesting command .................................................................................. 96
Command Control dialog box ................................................................................96
DP-OS page ............................................................................................... 97
Overview page ........................................................................................... 98
Give page................................................................................................... 99
Command Groups....................................................................................... 99
Controls and indicators.............................................................................. 100
Connect dialog box...............................................................................................102
CONTROLLER PROCESS STATIONS ................................ 103
Resetting controller process stations ....................................................................103
Resetting the controller PS in a single-computer system .............................. 103
Resetting one controller PS in a dual or triple redundant system................... 103
Resetting all controller PSs in a dual or triple redundant system ................... 104
Redundant systems ...............................................................................................104
Error objects............................................................................................. 105
Dual redundant system .............................................................................. 105
Triple redundant system ............................................................................ 106
Redundant Stations dialog box................................................................... 107
SENSORS ...................................................................... 111
Gyrocompasses..................................................................................................... 111
Sensors dialog box — Gyro page ................................................................111
Gyro status lamp....................................................................................... 113
Displayed heading information .................................................................. 113
Rejection of heading measurements ........................................................... 113
Faulty gyrocompasses ............................................................................... 114
Heading dropout ....................................................................................... 114
Gyro Deviation dialog box ........................................................................ 115
Wind sensors......................................................................................................... 116
Sensors dialog box — Wind page............................................................... 116
Wind status lamp ...................................................................................... 118
Faulty wind sensors .................................................................................. 118
Rejection of faulty wind data ..................................................................... 119
Operating without wind sensor input .......................................................... 120
Vertical reference sensors (VRS) .........................................................................120
Sensors dialog box — VRS page ............................................................... 120
VRS status lamp ....................................................................................... 121
Displayed VRS information....................................................................... 122
Faulty VRS .............................................................................................. 122

385575/D 5
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Sensors dialog box — Speed page .......................................................................122


Sensors dialog box — Draught page ....................................................................125
Sensors dialog box — Rate Of Turn page............................................................126
POSITION INFORMATION ............................................. 128
Handling position information .............................................................................128
Position Presentation dialog box ..........................................................................129
Datum Details dialog box.....................................................................................132
Local N/E Properties dialog box ..........................................................................133
UTM Properties dialog box ..................................................................................134
Methods for enabling position-reference systems................................................135
Panel buttons ........................................................................................................136
Reference System Settings dialog box .................................................................136
Reference System dialog box ...............................................................................139
Enable page.............................................................................................. 139
Weight page ............................................................................................. 140
Validation page ......................................................................................... 141
Reference System Properties dialog box..............................................................142
Quality Filter Actions................................................................................ 144
Coordinate systems...............................................................................................145
Global and local position-reference systems ............................................... 145
System datum ........................................................................................... 146
The reference origin.................................................................................. 146
Tests on position measurements ...........................................................................147
Standard deviation of position measurements.............................................. 147
Freeze test ................................................................................................ 148
Variance test ............................................................................................. 148
Prediction test........................................................................................... 149
Divergence test ......................................................................................... 149
Median test............................................................................................... 150
Procedures for enabling position-reference systems ............................................152
Enabling the first position-reference system................................................ 152
Enabling other position-reference systems .................................................. 153
Changing the reference origin ..............................................................................154
Position dropout ...................................................................................................154
MAIN MODES AND OPERATING PROCEDURES ............... 156
Standby mode .......................................................................................................156
Returning to Standby mode/manual levers .................................................. 157
Joystick mode .......................................................................................................157
From Standby mode to Joystick mode ........................................................ 158
Joystick control of position and heading ..................................................... 158
Position and heading information............................................................... 159

6 385575/D
Operator Manual

Joystick electrical failure ........................................................................... 159


Mixed joystick/auto modes........................................................................ 159
Joystick mode with automatic heading control ............................................ 159
Joystick mode with automatic position control in both surge and sway........... 160
Joystick mode with automatic stabilisation ................................................. 161
Auto Position mode ..............................................................................................163
From Joystick mode to Auto Position mode................................................ 163
CHANGING THE POSITION SETPOINT ........................... 165
Stopping the movement during change of position..............................................165
Marking a new position setpoint on the Posplot view..........................................166
Position R/B dialog box (range/bearing)..............................................................167
Position Inc dialog box (incremental) ..................................................................167
Position dialog box ...............................................................................................168
Inc page ................................................................................................... 168
R/B page .................................................................................................. 169
Abs page .................................................................................................. 170
Speed page ............................................................................................... 171
Speed Setpoint dialog box ....................................................................................172
Acceleration/Deceleration Settings dialog box ....................................................173
CHANGING THE HEADING SETPOINT ............................ 176
Stopping the rotation during change of heading ..................................................176
Marking a new heading setpoint on the Posplot view..........................................177
Heading Wheel and its associated buttons ...........................................................178
Heading dialog box ..............................................................................................179
Heading page............................................................................................ 179
Rate Of Turn page..................................................................................... 181
Acceleration/deceleration factors in the yaw axis ................................................181
THRUSTERS .................................................................. 183
Enabling thrusters.................................................................................................183
Thruster Enable dialog box........................................................................ 184
Automatic Thruster Start dialog box ....................................................................185
Thruster Allocation dialog box.............................................................................186
Allocation Settings dialog box .............................................................................189
Rudder/Nozzle control .........................................................................................191
Power optimal allocation......................................................................................191
Power Optimal Allocation dialog box..................................................................192
Thruster biasing ....................................................................................................193
Thruster Biasing dialog box .................................................................................193
Manual selection of thruster biasing ........................................................... 194
Automatically changing bias available ....................................................... 195
Turn factor ............................................................................................... 200

385575/D 7
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Angle factor ............................................................................................. 201


Inwards .................................................................................................... 202
Thruster Combinator Control Settings dialog box ...............................................204
Thruster Run-in dialog box ..................................................................................205
Clutch Settings dialog box ...................................................................................206
POWER SYSTEM ............................................................ 208
Power monitoring .................................................................................................208
Power load monitoring and blackout prevention .................................................208
SYSTEM STATUS INFORMATION ................................... 211
Remote Diagnostics dialog box............................................................................ 211
pcAnywhere Waiting... dialog box.......................................................................213
Print Status dialog box .........................................................................................213
Export Log Files dialog box .................................................................................216
About dialog box ..................................................................................................216
SYSTEM STATUS MONITORING ..................................... 219
Introduction ..........................................................................................................219
System architecture ..............................................................................................219
Operator stations....................................................................................... 220
Process stations ........................................................................................ 220
IO system................................................................................................. 221
Monitoring functions................................................................................. 222
Equipment dialog box ..........................................................................................223
PS page .................................................................................................... 224
PS Redundancy page................................................................................. 225
OS/HS page.............................................................................................. 226
Event Printer page .................................................................................... 227
Net Status................................................................................................. 228
Print Image............................................................................................... 229
Station Explorer dialog box..................................................................................230
IO Manager dialog box.........................................................................................232
RBUS IO Image ...................................................................................................235
Overview level ......................................................................................... 235
Detailed level ........................................................................................... 237
IO Terminal Block dialog box..............................................................................239
Shortcut menu .......................................................................................... 242
Signal Conditioning elements .................................................................... 242
IO Point Browser dialog box................................................................................244
Properties — DpPs Serial port .............................................................................247
SerPort page ............................................................................................. 248
Disable status page ................................................................................... 249
Resetting a disabled serial line .............................................................................250

8 385575/D
Operator Manual

BUILT-IN TRAINER ....................................................... 253


Trainer functions ..................................................................................................253
Using the trainer ...................................................................................................253
Setting the start position for the next session .......................................................255
Leaving the trainer................................................................................................255
DP ONLINE CONSEQUENCE ANALYSIS .......................... 256
DP online consequence analysis...........................................................................256
Selecting the DP class ..........................................................................................257
Consequence analysis status messages.................................................................257
Consequence analysis alarm messages.................................................................258
DISPLAY VIEWS............................................................ 259
Diesel view ...........................................................................................................259
Joystick view ........................................................................................................261
LTW view .............................................................................................................265
Light Taut Wire Plot view control .............................................................. 269
Numeric view .......................................................................................................270
Posplot view .........................................................................................................273
Posplot view — riser disconnect limit ........................................................ 278
Posplot view control ................................................................................. 280
EBL dialog box ........................................................................................ 284
Panning function....................................................................................... 284
Power view ...........................................................................................................285
Power Plot view control ............................................................................ 290
Power consumption view .....................................................................................291
Reference system main view ................................................................................292
Refsys view control .................................................................................. 298
Reference system status view...............................................................................301
Rotation center view.............................................................................................303
Sensor view ..........................................................................................................303
Thruster forces view .............................................................................................307
Thruster main view...............................................................................................309
Thruster view — tunnel thruster ..........................................................................314
Thruster Sub Plot view controls ................................................................. 315
Thruster view — azimuth thruster .......................................................................317
Thruster Sub Plot view controls ................................................................. 318
Thruster view — propeller/rudder.......................................................................320
Thruster Sub Plot view controls ................................................................. 322
Thruster setpoint feedback view...........................................................................323
Trends view ..........................................................................................................325
Trend Plot view control ............................................................................. 328

385575/D 9
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Glossary

Abbreviations
ARP Alternative Rotation Point
AP Autopilot (a device for automatic heading control)
BIST Built-In Self Test
BITE Built-In Test Equipment
cPos Kongsberg Compact Dynamic Positioning
CCW Counter Clockwise
CG Centre of Gravity
COG Course Over Ground
CW Clockwise
DGPS Differential GPS
DP Dynamic Positioning
DPC DP Controller
DPM Dynamic Positioning and Position Mooring
DQI Differential Quality Indicator
EBL Electronic Bearing Line
GPS Global Positioning System
HDOP Horizontal Dilution Of Precision
HPR Hydroacoustic Position Reference
IAS Integrated Automation System
I/O Input/Output
IMO International Maritime Organisation
KM Kongsberg Maritime
K-Pos Kongsberg Dynamic Positioning system
LTW Light-weight Taut Wire
MOB MOBile transponder
OS Operator Station
OT Operator Terminal
PM Position Mooring
PMS Power Management System
PS Process Station
RIO Remote Input - Output
rms root mean square

10 385575/D
Operator Manual

ROT Rate Of Turn


ROV Remotely Operated Vehicle
RPM Revolutions Per Minute
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply
UTC Universal Time Coordinated
UTM Universal Transverse Mercator
VRS Vertical Reference Sensor
WGS World Geodetic System
WOP Wheel Over Point
WP WayPoint
WT Wing Terminal

385575/D 11
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

General terms
Apparent wind See Relative wind.
Bearing The horizontal direction of one terrestrial point from another,
expressed as the angular distance from a reference direction,
clockwise through 360º.
Blackout A method of preventing a power failure due to overloading of the
prevention supply generators.
Cartesian A coordinate system where the axes are mutually-perpendicular
coordinate straight lines.
system
Command A group of functions that reflect the way the system will operate
group for a specific process area, for example, Propulsion and Propulsion
Simulation.
Controller A group of one or more controller process stations.
group
Course The horizontal direction in which a vessel is steered or is intended
to be steered, expressed as angular distance from north, usually
from 000º at north, clockwise through 360º. Differs from
Heading.
Crab angle The angle between the vessel heading and the track.
Cross-track The distance from the vessel's present position to the closest point
error on the track.
Datum Mathematical description of the shape of the earth (represented by
flattening and semi-major axis as well as the origin and orientation
of the coordinate systems used to map the earth).
Dead reckoning The process of determining the position of a vessel at any instant
by applying to the last well-determined position the run that has
since been made, based on the recent history of speed and heading
measurements.
Destination The immediate geographic point of interest to which a vessel
is navigating. It may be the next waypoint along a route of
waypoints or the final destination of a voyage.
Feedback Signals returned from the process (vessel) and used as input
signals to the Vessel Model.
Gyrocompass A compass having one or more gyroscopes as the directive
element, and which is north-seeking. Its operation depends
on four natural phenomena: gyroscopic inertia, gyroscopic
precession, the earth's rotation and gravity.

12 385575/D
Operator Manual

Heading The horizontal direction in which a vessel actually points or


heads at any instant, expressed in angular units from a reference
direction, normally true north, usually from 000º at the reference
direction clockwise through 360º. Differs from Course.
International Formally called IMCO, the IMO is the specialised agency of the
Maritime United Nations responsible for maritime safety and efficiency
Organisation of navigation.
Kalman filter The Kalman filter is a set of mathematical equations that provides
an efficient computational (recursive) solution of the least-squares
method. The filter is very powerful in several aspects; it supports
estimations of past, present and even future states, and it can also
do so, even when the precise nature of the modelled system is
unknown.
Leg The straight line between two waypoints.
Log An instrument for measuring the speed or distance or both
travelled by a vessel.
Median value A number dividing the higher half of a sample or population from
the lower half, i.e. the middle number.
Navigation leg The leg of a voyage on which the vessel is currently travelling.
Process Station One Central Processing Unit (CPU) plus I/O interfaces, possibly
shared with other CPUs in redundant configurations. A physical
PS may be single, part of a dual-redundant-physical PS or part
of a triple-redundant-physical PS. The PS utilises RCU or PC
hardware.
Reference origin The reference point of the first position-reference system that is
selected and accepted for use with the system. The origin in the
internal coordinate system.
Relative bearing The bearing of an object relative to the vessel's heading.
Relative wind The speed and relative direction from which the wind appears to
blow with reference to the moving vessel.
Route A planned course of travel, usually composed of more than one
navigation leg.
Standard The square root of the Variance.
Deviation
Surge Vessel movement in the fore-and-aft direction.
Sway Vessel movement in the transverse direction.
Thruster In this document, this is used as a general term for any element of
the vessel's propulsion system, such as an azimuth thruster, tunnel
thruster, main propulsion or rudder.
Track The intended or desired horizontal direction of travel with respect
to the earth.

385575/D 13
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Transponder In this document, this is the physical reference of a


position-reference system. For example: for an HPR system this
means any deployed transponder; for an Artemis system, the
Fixed Antenna unit/beacon; for a Taut Wire system, the depressor
weight.
True bearing Bearing relative to true north.
Unavailable Describes a status indication or entry field that is shown but
appears dimmed. An unavailable entry field cannot be changed.
Variance A measure of the expected deviation from the mean. The square
root of the variance is the standard deviation.
Vessel Reference A mathematical model of the vessel which makes it possible to
Model simulate vessel movements and behaviour in the horizontal plane
(surge, sway and yaw).
Waypoint A defined position or reference point on a track.
Wheel-over The point where a vessel is commanded to change heading before
point a waypoint.
Yaw Vessel rotation about the vertical axis (change of heading).

14 385575/D
K-Pos DP system theory

K-Pos DP system theory

This section contains the following topics:


The K-Pos DP system ......................................................................................................15
Basic forces and motions .................................................................................................15
K-Pos DP system principles ............................................................................................17

The K-Pos DP system


Kongsberg K-Pos DP system is a computerised system for automatic position and
heading control of a vessel.
To control the vessel's heading, the K-Pos DP system uses data from one or more
gyrocompasses, while at least one position-reference system (for example, DGPS or
hydroacoustics) enables the K-Pos DP system to position the vessel.
Setpoints for heading and position are specified by the operator and are then processed
by the K-Pos DP system to provide thrust control signals to the vessel's thruster and main
propeller systems. The K-Pos DP system always allocates optimum thrust to whichever
propulsion units are in use.
Deviations from the desired heading or position are automatically detected and
appropriate adjustments are made by the system.
The K-Pos DP system also provides a manual joystick control which may be used for
manual control alone or for combined manual/auto control.
Without a position-reference system, the K-Pos DP system can provide automatic
stabilization and control of the vessel heading using the gyrocompass as the heading
reference.
The DP system includes control strategies that will reduce fuel consumption and
greenhouse gases.

Basic forces and motions


A seagoing vessel is subjected to forces from wind, waves and current, as well as from
forces and moments generated by the vessel's propulsion system.

385575/D 15
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

The term “forces” in the following sections includes both forces and yawing moments,
unless otherwise stated. The vessel's responses to these forces, i.e. its changes in
position, heading and speed, are measured by position-reference systems, gyrocompasses
and vertical reference sensors. Reference system readings are corrected for roll and
pitch using readings from the vertical reference sensors. Wind speed and direction are
measured by the wind sensors.
The system calculates the forces that the thrusters must produce in order to control the
vessel's motion in three degrees of freedom - surge, sway and yaw - in the horizontal
plane.

Figure 1 Forces and motions

The vessel also moves in three vertical degrees of freedom: pitch, roll and heave.

Figure 2 Pitch, roll and heave

Pitch Roll Heave


(CD3292) (+ = bow up) (+ = starboard down) (+ = down)

The pitch and roll motions are not controlled by the K-Pos DP system. However, in order
to allow the position-reference system to correct for these motions, the system must have
information about them. This information is received from vertical reference sensors.

16 385575/D
K-Pos DP system theory

The K-Pos DP system does not control or require information about the heave motion,
but the motion can be measured and displayed.

K-Pos DP system principles


A simplified block diagram of the K-Pos DP system is shown in system principles Figure
3, and described in the sections that follow.

Figure 3 K-Pos DP system block diagram

The K-Pos DP system relies on a mathematical vessel model which includes


hydrodynamic characteristics such as current drag coefficients and virtual mass data.
This model, called the Mathematical Vessel Model, describes how the vessel responds to
an applied force, e.g. from wind or thrusters.

The Extended Kalman Filter


The Extended Kalman Filter estimates the vessel's heading, position and velocity in each
of the three degrees of freedom - surge, sway and yaw. It also incorporates algorithms
for estimating the effect of sea current and waves.
The Extended Kalman Filter uses a mathematical model of the vessel. A mathematical
model itself is never a 100% accurate representation of the real vessel. However, by
using the Extended Kalman filtering technique, the model is continuously corrected.

385575/D 17
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

The vessel's heading and position are measured using the gyrocompasses and
position-reference systems, and are used as input data to the K-Pos DP system. These
measurements are compared with the predicted or estimated data produced by the
mathematical model, and the differences are then used to update the model.

Figure 4 Simplified block diagram showing the extended Kalman Filter

The Extended Kalman Filter provides the following advantages:


• Optimum self-adaptive noise filtering of heading and position measurements
according to noise level and measurement-update rate.
• Optimum combination of data from the different position-reference systems. The
system calculates a variance for each position-reference system in use, and places
different weighting on their measurements according to each system's individual
quality.
• In the absence of position measurements, the model provides a “dead-reckoning”
mode. This means that the system is able to perform positioning for some time
without position measurement updates from any position-reference systems.
In the Extended Kalman Filter, the Mathematical Vessel Model's reliability and the
noise level of the position measurement are the basis for deciding how much to trust
each measurement. As time elapses the model uncertainty will decrease by learning
from measured vessel response.

18 385575/D
K-Pos DP system theory

The process is adaptive. If, for example, only one position-reference system is active
and it has a low update rate, the model uncertainty will increase in the periods between
measurements, and the vessel model will therefore be heavily updated with each
measurement.
Offshore trials have verified that the K-Pos DP system principles give:
• Improved suppression of noise in position measurement with a better station-keeping
performance.
• Reduced power consumption and wear and tear on the thrusters due to the improved
suppression.
• A robust handling of combined high and low update rate position sensors, such as
DGPS and traditional Long Base-Line hydroacoustic positioning.
The Extended Kalman Filter is also used for the heading information based on
measurement from the actual gyrocompass in use.
Additional advantages can be obtained by use of:
• Speed measurements
Speed measurements can be used as an addition to position measurements to improve
the vessel speed control, and to make calibration of position measurements faster
when sailing at high speed.
A combination of speed measurement and a position-reference system will be better
able to handle drop out of position measurements during sailing.
The speed measurement interface can be DGPS or Doppler Log.
• ROT measurements
ROT (Rate Of Turn) measurements from ROT sensors can be used to improve the
heading control of the vessel. This is useful when very accurate heading control is
required during high-speed sailing, or when the vessel has a hull shape that makes it
difficult to control the heading.

The Controller
The controller calculates the resulting force to be exerted by the thrusters/propellers in
order for the vessel to remain on station.

DP control strategy
In station-keeping operations, the K-Pos DP controller can be working in several of the
following modes, all with special characteristics:
• High Precision control
• Relaxed control
• Green control
High Precision control provides high accuracy station-keeping in any weather condition
at the expense of power consumption and exposure to wear and tear of machinery and
thrusters.

385575/D 19
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Relaxed control uses the thrusters more smoothly, at the expense of station-keeping
accuracy. However, this type of control cannot guarantee that the vessel will stay within
its operational area, and is mainly applicable for calm weather conditions.
Green control uses a different control technology called non-linear Model Predictive
Control, which is optimised for precise area keeping with minimum power consumption.
Green control is applicable in all weather conditions.
The transition between K-Pos DP controller modes is bumpless.

High Precision and Relaxed control


The controller consists of the following parts:
• Excursion Feedback
The deviation between the operator-specified position/heading setpoints and the
actual position/heading data, and similar deviations with respect to the vessel's
velocity/heading rate, drive the excursion feedback. The differences are multiplied by
gain factors giving a force demand (restoring demand and damping demand) required
to bring the vessel back to its setpoint values while also slowing down its movements.
The main difference between High Precision control and Relaxed control is the
restoring characteristics of the two controller types:

Figure 5 High Precision and Relaxed control

Thrust

High precision

Relaxed

(CD3320) Position deviation


• Wind Feed-Forward
In order to counteract the wind forces as quickly as possible, the feed-forward concept
is used. This means that the K-Pos DP system will not allow the vessel to drift away
from the required position, but counteracts the wind-induced forces as soon as they
are detected.
• Current Feedback
The excursion feedback and wind feed-forward are not sufficient to bring the vessel
back to the desired setpoints due to unmeasured external forces (such as waves

20 385575/D
K-Pos DP system theory

and current). The system estimates these forces over time, and calculates the force
demand required to counteract them.

Green control
In the Green control mode, the system maintains the vessel within an allowed area with
minimum use of power.
The controller design consists of two main parts, each giving its contribution to the
control:
• The Environment Compensator is designed to compensate for the averaged
environmental forces, which will maintain the required position under averaged
conditions.
• The Model Predictive Controller (MPC) uses a prediction (Position Predictor) of
the vessel movement as input for the control. When the operational boundaries are
predicted to be exceeded, the controller reacts to ensure that the vessel stays within
the operational area (see Figure 6).

Figure 6 Vessel under Green control in the operational area

The very smooth control actions reduce wear and tear on mechanical parts of the power
and thruster system and reduce fuel consumption and greenhouse gases.
A simplified block diagram of the MPC Green control is shown in Figure 7.
Due to its nature, the MPC will not instantaneously react to sudden changes in external
forces, such as wind gusts, unless the Position Predictor detects that actions must be
taken immediately. Unnecessary sudden use of thrust is therefore avoided.
The Position Predictor includes the mathematical model of the vessel used in the
Extended Kalman Filter of the DP. The predicted position and heading are found
step–by–step for the whole prediction horizon (1 to 2 minutes).

385575/D 21
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

The non-linear Model Predictive Controller is an online optimisation function, finding


the best compromise between using thrust and predicted overstepping of operational
boundaries.

Figure 7 Green control structure

Thruster allocation
The controller of the K-Pos DP system continuously calculates the actual force
requirements in the alongships and athwartships directions (the force demand), and the
required rotational moment (the turning moment demand).
The Thruster Allocation distributes these demands as pitch/rpm/force/load and azimuth
control signals to each thruster/propeller, thus obtaining the force and moment required
for the position and heading control.
If it is not possible to maintain both the turning moment and the force demand due
to insufficient available thrust, priority is normally set to obtain the turning moment
demand (heading).
If a thruster/propeller is out of service or deselected, the “lost” thrust is automatically
redistributed to the remaining thrusters/propellers.
The magnitude of thrust allocated is reduced if the available power is too low to meet
the thrust demand. The allocated thrust will however still be correct with respect to the
direction of thrust. Heading (or position) priority is also kept in such a situation.
Power optimal allocation is the primary barrier for preventing blackouts and requires the
same information as that required for Power Load Monitoring and Blackout Prevention.

22 385575/D
User interface

User interface

This section contains the following topics:


Operator station................................................................................................................23
Operator panel..................................................................................................................24
Display layout ..................................................................................................................29
Display views...................................................................................................................49

Operator station
The K-Pos DP operator station
includes a high-resolution colour flat
screen for monitoring and operation
of the system, and an operator panel
with push buttons, lamps and joystick
controls.
The power switch and adjustment
controls for the screen are placed on
the right hand side of the screen. The
use of the power switch and adjustment
controls is described in the Hardware
Module Description for the screen.
Some systems are delivered with a
secondary screen which includes the
same display layout and information,
but the operator is allowed to select
panes also on the dashboard.

385575/D 23
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Operator panel
The operator panel provides:
• Dedicated buttons (most of these have status lamps)
• Keypad
• Trackball
• 3-axis joystick
• Heading wheel and buttons

Push buttons
Several push buttons with status lamps are provided on the operator panel for activation
of main modes, position-reference systems, thrusters and functions. The accompanying
status lamps indicate activation of a particular function, mode or system.
Other frequently-used functions, such as selection of display views and dialog boxes,
may also have dedicated push buttons on the operator panel.
The buttons are grouped according to their main function. For safety reasons, some of
the buttons must be pressed twice within four seconds to invoke action. These buttons
are indicated by a white line along the lower edge.

24 385575/D
User interface

Figure 8 Examples of buttons: double press (TAKE button for taking command) and
single press (ACK button for acknowledging messages)

Note that the appearance of push buttons may vary from vessel to vessel.

Modes
The MODES button group contains buttons for selecting the main operational modes.
Status lamps indicate the current mode.
Three additional buttons allow you to select individual axes for automatic control. These
are referred to as the SURGE, SWAY and YAW buttons throughout this manual.
Figure 9 shows the button arrangement for an OS where the operator looks in the
alongships direction whilst looking at the screen.

Figure 9 Surge, sway and yaw buttons on an OS that is orientated in the alongships
direction

Figure 10 shows the button arrangement for an OS where the operator looks in the
athwartships direction whilst looking at the screen.

Figure 10 Sway, surge and yaw buttons on an OS that is orientated in the athwartships
direction

Controls
The CONTROLS button group contains buttons for accessing system functions and
dialog boxes.

Views
The VIEWS button group contains buttons for selecting the view to be displayed in the
main working area of the screen.

Thrusters
The THRUSTERS button group contains buttons for enabling thrusters.

385575/D 25
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Sensors
The SENSORS button group contains buttons for enabling position-reference systems
and for initiating dialog boxes related to other system sensors.

Command
The COMMAND button group contains buttons for transferring command to one Operator
Station or operator terminal from another.

Alarms
The ALARMS button group contains indicators and buttons
to display and acknowledge alarms and events. The SILENCE
button, shown to the left, is used to silence the audible signal
without acknowledging the Emergency or Alarm message that
caused it.

For more information about messages and the ALARMS button group, see Message
system on page 79.

Input keypad
The INPUT keypad provides keys that are used to enter values or text into dialog boxes.
This button toggles between numeric and alphanumeric mode.
Numeric mode is the default. Press the button for one second to
toggle. A short beep will confirm the change. The lamp is lit
green when the panel is in alphanumeric mode (letters) and not
lit when in numeric mode (numbers).
When the panel is in numeric mode and any of the numeric keys
are pressed, the corresponding number is entered.
When the panel is in alphanumeric mode and any of the numeric
keys from 2 through 9 is pressed once, the first letter on that key is
entered. Press the key twice to enter the second letter, three times
to enter the third letter and four times to enter the fourth letter.
In alphanumeric mode this button toggles between non-capital
and capital letters. Non-capital letters is the default. Press the
button for one second to toggle.
Pressing this button deletes one character to the left (backspace).

26 385575/D
User interface

This is the ENTER key. Pressing this key applies the value or text
you have written to the system (i.e. corresponds with clicking
the OK button on a dialog box).

PAGE UP Same functions as on a standard keyboard.


PAGE DOWN
HOME
ESC

Trackball
The TRACKBALL is used to position the cursor on the screen.
The tree outer buttons are used as the buttons on a computer
mouse:
• The left button is used to click on screen buttons, choose
from menus and select displayed symbols.
• The right button is used to display a shortcut menu.
• The middle button is not used.
The four inner buttons are used as the arrow buttons on a computer keyboard.
Note
Be careful when using the outer buttons so that you don’t press the inner Up button at
the same time.

Joystick
In Joystick mode, the operator controls the positioning
of the vessel using the three-axis joystick (integrated
joystick and rotate controller).
To move the vessel in the surge and sway axes (alongships
and athwartships directions), tilt the joystick. The
direction in which the joystick is tilted determines the
direction of applied thruster force, and the angle of tilt
determines the amount of applied thruster force.
To turn the vessel (the yaw axis), rotate the joystick. The direction in which the joystick is
rotated determines the direction of the rotational moment demand, and the angle through
which the joystick is rotated determines the amount of applied rotational moment.

Heading wheel
The Heading Wheel comprises one heading wheel and seven buttons. Three of these
buttons are located in front. The other four form a circle close to the heading wheel.

385575/D 27
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

The functions that are available depend on the present mode.

HEADING (DECREASE/ACTIVATE/INCREASE)
To perform a change of heading using the heading wheel, one of these three
associated buttons must be pressed. The heading setpoint can be changed by
turning the heading wheel or by using the DECREASE or INCREASE buttons.
HEADING WHEEL
This is used for setting a new heading.
RATE OF TURN
TURN RADIUS
For adjusting the Rate Of Turn (ROT) or Turn Radius.
DISTANCE TO TURN
For adjusting the Distance To Turn.

28 385575/D
User interface

Display layout
The display interface uses standard Microsoft Windows operating features such as
menus and dialog boxes.
The display is divided into a number of predefined areas as shown in the following figure.
In addition to these, dialog boxes are displayed whenever operator interaction is required.

In some deliveries other display sizes are used. The principles for dividing the display
into top bar, dashboard and working areas, as well as the principles of operation are the
same as for the display with aspect ratio 16:9. Example of display layout for ratio 16:9.

385575/D 29
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Example of display layout for ratio 16:10. The difference from the standard layout is that
the side bar is not visible. The functions usually available on the side bar are accessible
through the View menu.

30 385575/D
User interface

Example of display layout for ratio 4:3. The difference from the standard layout is that
there are only six panes on the right-hand side working area in stead of nine, and that
the side bar is not visible. The functions usually available on the side bar are accessible
through the View menu.

385575/D 31
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Top bar
The information on the top bar, presented by controls
and indicators, is grouped in different parts showing the
following:
• product name
• date and time
• operator station and user name
• drop-down menu for detailed system information
• operation mode
• controller PS group
• information about unacknowledged alarms
• menu buttons for accessing dialog boxes

32 385575/D
User interface

The system status provides information about the Operator station and the user, in
addition to the product name and current date and time.

When the built-in simulator is in use the text SIMULATING replaces the name of the
user: . The text changes also when the remote diagnostics are
running.

Clicking the extension button provides detailed system information such as delivery
name, system software version, etc.

You can close the information box by clicking the collapse button .
The indicator shows current operation mode.
When the Operator station is in command the command group button,
e.g. ‘Main: DP’ is green. Pressing this button activates the Command
Control dialog box. If the thrusters are not ready but the operator
station is in command, the background colour of the button is yellow
.

The alarm area shows the most recent emergency, alarm or warning message that has not
yet been acknowledged.

385575/D 33
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

The icon shows the priority of the alarm:


• red — highest priority Alarm and Emergency
• yellow — second priority Warning
Clicking the icon acknowledges the alarm and it disappears from the
top bar but can still be seen in the Event list view.
Represents the time and date when the alarm was generated.

Represents the tag name of the OS alarm.

The icon is a short-cut to more information about the alarm. Clicking


the icon activates the online help for system events. (See Message
explanations — online help on page 89.)
The extension button shows the number of unacknowledged alarms.
Clicking the icon expands the list of alarms because only two alarms
are visible on the top bar at any time.

The colour of the extension button is the colour of the unacknowledged


alarm with highest priority, e.g.:

or:

The menu buttons provide command menus allowing access to the respective dialog
boxes. Which menus are available depends on the configuration of the delivered system.

Because some commands are relevant to specific modes, these are not available until the
relevant mode is selected:

34 385575/D
User interface

Dashboard layout
The dashboard area shows important performance information to allow immediate
assessment of the situation. On the operator station in command, the content of this area
cannot be altered by the operator, but changes automatically according to the selected
main mode. On the operator station not in command, you can change the panes that are
shown, but as soon as the operator station takes command, the layout of the dashboard
goes back to default.
Several parts of the dashboard area are click-sensitive. At the same time as the cursor
image changes when it is moved over a click-sensitive object, a tooltip is displayed for a
few seconds. This text explains the use of the click-sensitive object.

Vessel speed pane


The pane gives the vessel’s speed. It also contains
an arrowhead (and a numerical reading) indicating
the vessel’s course.

385575/D 35
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

The vessel's speed is given in the top right-hand corner of the pane.
SOG/STW: The indicator next to the reading for speed tells you whether
speed over ground (SOG) or speed through water (STW) is shown.
The name of the sensor measuring the speed is usually shown. If the
vessel speed is input manually this is indicated by the text Manual on pink
background, or if it is calculated by the system it is indicated by the text
Model on pink background.
This area is click-sensitive. The ordinary cursor changes to a pointing hand
when positioned over this area. Clicking the left trackball button shows
the setpoint values in orange colour.

The blue arrowhead indicates the course over ground together with the
value in degrees.

Forward/reverse speed: The value of the speed forwards or revers is shown


in the centre of the fixed ship symbol, where it appears beneath the arrow
indicating forwards (green) or reverse (pink).
This area is click-sensitive. The ordinary cursor changes to a pointing hand
when positioned over this area. Clicking the left trackball button opens the
Speed Setpoint dialog box.

Transverse speed: Transverse speeds astern and at the bow are also shown,
green arrow to starboard, pink arrow to port.

36 385575/D
User interface

Joystick pane
The pane displays joystick-related information during Joystick
mode.
The joystick setpoint is indicated by the orange line and is
shown as two percentage values (ahead or astern for surge and
port or starboard for sway). The obtained response (feedback)
is indicated by the blue bar.
The tilt of the joystick is indicated by the filled grey circle and
dashed coordinate lines that are positioned relative to the centre
of the cross formation (zero tilt).
Note
The joystick setpoint relative to the joystick tilt depends on the
joystick thrust and the active joystick precision settings.

This area is click-sensitive. The ordinary cursor changes to a


pointing hand when positioned over this area. Clicking the
left trackball button opens the Joystick view in the right-hand
working area.

In Mixed Joystick/Auto modes, the bars for the surge or sway


axis in automatic control are replaced by a position deviation
bar graph.
The joystick setpoint and response for the axis in joystick
control is indicated as described for the Joystick mode.
The direction of the joystick tilt in the axis under joystick
control is indicated by the position of the filled grey circle.

385575/D 37
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Position deviation in the axis under automatic control is


indicated by a single bidirectional bar which represents the
deviation from the position setpoint. The colour of the bar
changes in relation to the position warning and alarm limits:
• Yellow — Warning limit exceeded
• Red — Alarm limit exceeded

Position deviation pane


In Auto Position mode:
The position deviation is shown both graphically
and numerically. An arrow symbol shows
whether the estimated position is moving
towards (green colour, decreasing deviation) or
away from (pink colour, increasing deviation)
the position setpoint.

This area is click-sensitive. The ordinary cursor changes to a pointing hand when
positioned over this area. Clicking the left trackball button opens the Alarm Limits
dialog box.
The position deviation is indicated by a filled circle whose radius represents the deviation
from the position setpoint. The colour of the circle changes in relation to the position
warning and alarm limits (if active):
• Grey — Within the limits
• Yellow — Warning limit exceeded
• Red — Alarm limit exceeded

38 385575/D
User interface

385575/D 39
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Heading pane

This shows numerical and graphical information relevant for manual and automatic
heading control functions. The information changes automatically according to the
selected main mode.
The title area also indicates the mode in which the heading
is controlled.

Auto control axis and Auto damping axis


These are graphic indications of the axes that are under
automatic control or damping control.
The descriptions of the surge and sway axes apply to a system
with the vessel diagram displayed “bow up” (see Orientation
of the OS and effect on display views on page 49).

The surge axis is under automatic or damping control.

The sway axis is under automatic or damping control.

The yaw axis is under automatic or damping control.

When automatic heading control is selected, the heading


deviation is displayed.
Heading deviation is indicated by a bidirectional bar that
represents the deviation from the heading setpoint. The colour
of the bar changes in relation to the heading warning and alarm
limits:
• Yellow — Warning limit exceeded

40 385575/D
User interface

• Red — Alarm limit exceeded

When the system is under joystick heading control in Joystick


mode, the turning force setpoint and the resulting vessel
response are shown by a bar and a numeric value.
The rotation of the joystick is indicated by a dark-grey triangle.
The turning force setpoint is indicated by the orange line and a
light-grey triangle.
The obtained turning moment is indicated by numeric value (in
percent port or starboard). With full thrust selected, the range
is 100% port to 100% starboard whereas with reduced thrust
selected, the range is typically, 50% port to 50% starboard.

The vessel heading (either as estimated by the Vessel Model,


or from the gyrocompass in use) is shown graphically against a
rotating compass rose and as a numeric value.
The heading setpoint is shown graphically on the compass rose
as an orange triangle. The current heading is a blue triangle.
When the system is in Joystick mode (with or without automatic
heading control selected) or Auto Position mode, the displayed
vessel heading is as estimated by the Vessel Model. This is
indicated by the text Model being shown under the numeric
value.
This area is click-sensitive. The ordinary cursor changes to a
pointing hand when positioned over this area. Clicking the left
trackball button shows the setpoint values in orange colour.

Shows the selected control strategy for station-keeping


operations, and the gain level (applicable for High Precision
and Relaxed modes).

385575/D 41
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

This area is click-sensitive. The ordinary cursor changes to a


pointing hand when positioned over this area. Clicking the left
trackball button opens the Gain dialog box.

The vessel's Rate Of Turn (ROT) is shown numerically in


degrees per minute (as in this example) to port or starboard.
This area is click-sensitive. The ordinary cursor changes to a
pointing hand when positioned over this area. Clicking the left
trackball button shows the setpoint values in orange colour.

Shows the status of the gyro compasses: enabled and in use (in
this example gyro 1), enabled, but not in use (in this example
gyro 2 and 3) and not enabled (in this example gyro 4 and 5).
This area is click-sensitive. The ordinary cursor changes to a
pointing hand when positioned over this area. Clicking the left
trackball button opens the Sensors dialog box.

Rotation center position pane


The coordinates show the position of the vessel’s
rotation centre. The reference point of the first
position-reference system selected and accepted
for use with the system, becomes the reference
origin (the origin in the internal coordinate
system). Position information from any other
reference systems is then calibrated according to
this coordinate system.

The different areas are click-sensitive:


• clicking on the coordinates shows the position setpoint in orange text,
• clicking on the vessel symbol opens the Rotation Center dialog box,
• clicking on the name of the reference origin opens the Reference System Settings
dialog box,
• clicking on the area indicating the DP class opens the DP Class dialog box.

42 385575/D
User interface

During position drop-out the background changes


to pink to indicate the error situation.

Power consumption pane


There is a separate bar graph displayed for each
connect-switchboard (1, 2, 3, etc.). This means
that the number of displayed bar graphs will
be automatically adjusted to reflect the vessel's
connect-switchboard configuration whenever it
is changed due to bus-tie breakers being opened
and closed.
The height of each bar graph is scaled
to represent the generator capacity of the
corresponding connect-switchboard. In the
example, connect-switchboard 1 has a larger
generator capacity than connect-switchboard 2.
Each bar graph has a blue bar and two predefined power consumption limits (one for
warning and one for alarm) that are shown as dashed horizontal lines. A yellow frame
around the bar graph indicates that the lower (warning) limit (typically 60%) is exceeded.
A red frame around the bar graph indicates that the upper (alarm) limit (typically 80%) is
exceeded.
This area is click-sensitive. The ordinary cursor changes to a pointing hand when
positioned over this area. Clicking the left trackball button displays the Power view in
the right-hand side working area.

385575/D 43
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Side bar
The side bar contains buttons for quick access to functions
concerning the display:
• changing the light and colours on the display (palettes)
• selecting special display views and display orientation
• defining and selecting combinations of display views and
panes in the two working areas
A check mark on the palette button shows which
option is selected.
N UP is North UP. All views in the working area
that show the vessel’s heading will be displayed in a
fixed orientation (north-up), while the heading of the
vessel symbol is shown as relative.
H REL is Heading RELative. All views in the
working area that show the vessel’s heading will be
displayed relative to the vessel heading, while the
heading of the vessel symbol is fixed.

Note
The compass rose on the Heading pane will always
work as a compass and is not affected by this button.

Working areas
The working areas show operator-selectable display views.
The area on the left-hand side displays detailed views. The operator can select which
main views will be displayed.
The area on the right-hand side is divided into panes which display different information.
The operator can select what information will be displayed. In addition detailed views
can be displayed replacing the nine panes with one view.
A predefined combination of display views and panes can be stored and selected by
one button click.

Dialog boxes
You can enter data into the system using dialog boxes. These are displayed using panel
buttons, selecting menu commands or by clicking on graphical symbols in the views
or icons on the top bar.
Dialog boxes appear in the working area and you can move them as required.

44 385575/D
User interface

To locate information about individual dialog boxes, use the Index at the end of this
manual.
When data has been modified on a dialog box, the message (Changed) is added to the
title bar text.
Data entered on a dialog box is not used by the system until you confirm the input by
clicking the Apply or OK button:
• If you click the OK button, the changes that you have made are applied and the dialog
box is removed from the display. If any data errors are found, no changes are made
and the dialog box remains open.
• If you click the Cancel button, no changes are made and the dialog box is removed
from the display.
• If you click the Apply button, the changes that you have made are applied and the
dialog box remains open.
When you are not allowed to make changes to the data on a dialog box, both the OK
and Apply buttons will be unavailable (dimmed). This can occur, for example, when the
Operator Station is not in command or the system is not in an appropriate mode.

Some dialog boxes have several pages which you access by clicking on the page tab.
For this type of dialog box, both the Apply and OK buttons apply the changes that you
have made on all pages of the dialog box.
Click the Cancel button to close the dialog box without action. If a dialog box can be
accessed by pressing a panel button, pressing this panel button while the dialog box is
displayed closes the dialog box without action.

Entering numeric values


Numeric values can be entered into text boxes in dialog boxes, you can achieve this
in several different ways, depending on the types of numeric input field used and the
functionality available on the Operator Station.
There are two types of input fields used for entering numeric values:

385575/D 45
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Text box
This is a rectangular box in which you can type a numeric value. If the box
already contains a numerical value, you can select the value to be used or
delete it and type in a new value.
Spin box
This is a text box equipped with two additional up and down arrows (on the
right-hand side) that can be clicked to increase or decrease the numerical
value by a fixed increment. A numerical value can also be typed directly in
the box.

On an operator panel equipped with a numeric keypad, this keypad represents the easiest
way to enter numeric values.
However, the Enter a New Numeric Value dialog box may be used. This will be displayed
on the screen when enabled, and is especially suited to Operator Stations having:
• No numeric keypad on the operator panel
• Touch sensitive screens

Enabling the Enter a New Numeric Value dialog box


The Enter a New Numeric Value dialog box must be enabled before use.
To enable the Enter a New Numeric Value dialog box:
1 Select Tools→Numeric Entry Dialog.
• The Numeric Entry Keypad Dialog Use dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the Enable Numeric Entry Keypad Dialog check box and click the OK button.
• The Enter a New Numeric Value dialog box is enabled.
To test the Enter a New Numeric Value dialog box:
1 In the Numeric Entry Keypad Dialog Use dialog box, ensure that Enable Numeric
Entry Keypad Dialog is selected.
2 Place the cursor in the Enter a numeric value text box and click the left trackball
button.
• The Enter a New Numeric Value dialog box is displayed.

46 385575/D
User interface

3 Enter a new numeric value in the Enter a numeric value: text box using the numeric
keys on the Enter a New Numeric Value dialog box and then click the OK button (on
the Enter a New Numeric Value dialog box).
4 Click the OK button on the Numeric Entry Keypad Dialog Use dialog box.
• The Enter a New Numeric Value dialog box is tested and ready for use.

Enter a New Numeric Value dialog box


In the Numeric Entry Keypad Dialog Use dialog box, select the Enable Numeric Entry
Keypad Dialog check box and click the OK button. Click in the Enter a numeric value
text box.

385575/D 47
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Deletes the digit to the left of the cursor.

Deletes the digit to the right of the cursor.

Deletes the entire number.


Moves the cursor to the far left on the text box.

Moves the cursor one digit to the left.

Moves the cursor to the far right on the text box.

Moves the cursor one digit to the right.

Input validation of entered values


When you enter a numerical value, it is validated by the system. The value must be
within the selected display format limits for this data type (for example, a heading value
must be between 0 and 360 degrees). If you enter an illegal value, and then click the OK
or Apply button, an Illegal value dialog box is displayed.

48 385575/D
User interface

Click the OK button on this dialog box. The illegal value will remain highlighted in
the text box until it is corrected.
If the dialog box has more than one page, and you enter an illegal value on one of the
pages, the validation will be performed when you click the OK or Apply button, even
though another page is displayed. The dialog box is automatically displayed with the
page containing the illegal value on top.
If more than one validation error occurs, all errors are listed in one message box. In the
dialog box, however, only the first error will be highlighted.

Display views
Display views present the operator with information about the operation.

Orientation of the OS and effect on display views


Several of the display views show information relative to a diagram of the vessel; for
example, thrusters are shown on the Thrusters view in their relative positions on the
vessel diagram. The orientation of the vessel diagram is configured to suit the orientation
of the Operator Station, so that it is easier to interpret what is seen on the screen. There
are four possible orientations which are generally used in the following situations:
• The operator is facing forward in the vessel when looking at the display screen. The
vessel diagram is displayed “bow up” on the display.
• The operator is facing to starboard in the vessel when looking at the display screen.
The vessel diagram is displayed “bow left” on the display.
• The operator is facing aft in the vessel when looking at the display screen. The vessel
diagram is displayed “bow down” on the display.
• The operator is facing to port in the vessel when looking at the display screen. The
vessel diagram is displayed “bow right” on the display.
In this manual, the example display views show the vessel diagram “bow up”. For
other orientations, the displayed information in each view is the same, but it may be
arranged differently.

Tooltip/hotspot cursor and change of cursor image


In many of the display views, the ordinary cursor changes to a pointing hand (the hotspot
cursor) when it is moved over an area defined as click-sensitive. Typical examples
of such click-sensitive areas are:
• Push buttons for zooming in and out.
• Numerical fields showing other related numerical values when clicked.
• Graphical fields showing a specific dialog box when clicked.
• Change of position setpoint.

385575/D 49
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

• Opening another view related to the specific component you click.


• Opening the control dialog box for a specific plot, etc.
At the same time as the cursor image changes
when it is moved over a click-sensitive object,
a hotspot cursor text in a tooltip is displayed for
a few seconds. This text explains the use of the
click-sensitive object.

Selecting display views and panes


Panes can be displayed only on the right-hand side working area.
To select a pane to be displayed:
1 Place the cursor on the upper left corner of any of the panes.
A drop-down menu with a list of available panes is displayed.

2 Click on a name to select the pane.


Detail views can be displayed on the left-hand side working area.
To select a detail view to be displayed:
1 Press the appropriate button in the VIEWS button group on the operator panel.
or
2 Place the cursor on the upper left corner of the working area.
A drop-down menu with a list of available views is displayed.

50 385575/D
User interface

Detail views can also be displayed on the right-hand side working area from a
click-sensitive pane. When the cursor within a pane changes into a pointing finger
and the tooltip 'Detail view' appears, you can click and replace the nine panes with
a corresponding display view. To return to the panes, click the cross icon in the upper
right corner.

View control dialog boxes


Many of the views have control dialog boxes for selecting the displayed information
and controlling features of the view. These dialog boxes are accessed via the shortcut
menu for the view.
To display the control dialog box for a view:
1 Place the cursor anywhere in the view and click the right trackball button.
• The shortcut menu is displayed.
2 Select View Control on this shortcut menu.
• The control dialog box for the view is displayed.
• If the view does not have an associated control dialog box, then View Control
is not available on the shortcut menu.

385575/D 51
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Zooming
To zoom a view that is displayed in the working areas, click Zoom In on the shortcut
menu. The view is enlarged by approximately 60%, centered on the cursor position
when the shortcut menu was displayed.
A zoomed view can be panned or zoomed again. Place the cursor in the required area and
click the right trackball button. A variant of the following shortcut menu is displayed:

Clicking Zoom In zooms the view again, centred on the cursor position when this menu
was displayed.
Clicking Zoom Reset returns the view to its original scale.
Clicking Center Here pans the view so that it is centred on the cursor position when
this menu was displayed.
Clicking Center Reset returns the centre of the view to its original position.

Preselect dialog box


You can preselect sets of views to be displayed in the two parts of the working area and
link them to buttons on the side bar. When you then click one of these buttons, the
preselected set of views is displayed. Any settings defined in the respective view using
the view control dialog boxes will be saved and viewed together with the predefined
configuration of views and panes.
The Preselect dialog box allows you to inspect recorded view-selections and record
new view-selections.
To display this dialog box, select Preselected→Settings from the Side bar.

52 385575/D
User interface

Note
For systems without a Side bar use the menu View →Preselect and View →Use Preselect.

Inspect recorded view-selections:


You can inspect the set of display views currently linked to a number on the menu
by clicking the associated button. The display view titles are then shown in the
layout on the dialog box.
Record NEW view-selection:
While the Preselect dialog box is displayed, select the required views in the display
areas, and then click the appropriate numbered button on the dialog box. When
you click the Close button, these views are linked to the respective button.
These numbered buttons can also be preconfigured to be either operator
programmable or not. All numbered buttons which are not operator programmable
appear dimmed on the Preselect dialog box. The views displayed when a
corresponding number on the side bar is clicked, are all preconfigured.
You can also give names to the sets of views using the Configure names button on this
dialog box.

385575/D 53
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

In order to type a name, click the Keyboard button:

54 385575/D
System settings

System settings

This section contains the following topics:


Changing user ..................................................................................................................55
Printing the display picture ..............................................................................................56
Printing system report ......................................................................................................57
Adjusting the panel light..................................................................................................57
Presentation Units dialog box ..........................................................................................59
Set System Date/Time dialog box....................................................................................62
Changing display colours.................................................................................................62
Alarm Limits dialog box..................................................................................................63
Gain dialog box................................................................................................................65
Quick model update .........................................................................................................68
Rotation Center dialog box ..............................................................................................70

Changing user
There are three types of users defined for the K-Pos DP system:
• Operator
When the K-Pos DP system is started, the user is set to Operator. This is the normal
user of the K-Pos DP system.
• Chief
The “Chief” can operate the system in the same way as the “Operator”, but in addition
can perform the following functions:
– Set the system date and time
– Calibrate the joystick
• System
This user is reserved for installation and service work performed by trained personnel
from Kongsberg Maritime.
The Change User dialog box allows you to change the user.
To display this dialog box, select System→ (Access control) Change User.

385575/D 55
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Select the required user in the New user


list box and click the Change user button.
The “Chief” user also requires to enter a
correct Password (supplied by Kongsberg
Maritime).

Printing the display picture


To print a hard copy of the current display picture, press the HARDCOPY button. The
whole screen picture is printed on a general-purpose printer connected to an Operator
Station.
The standard Microsoft Windows Print Setup dialog box is used to define which printer
is to be used.
To display this dialog box, select System→ (Printer settings) Hardcopy printer.

You can use this dialog box to select the printer and to define the printer set-up.

56 385575/D
System settings

Printing system report


It is possible to produce a status page where vital data from major hardware units in the
system are listed. Only units that are up and running will be listed.
To display the report, select Tools→System Report.
The system report will appear in an internet browser window.

Figure 11 System Report (example)

Adjusting the panel light


Dimming level
You can set the required light intensity for the indicator (status) lamps on the operator
panel, and for the background lamps in the buttons themselves.

385575/D 57
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

To change the dimming level:


1 Select View→ (Panel) Light Configuration.
• The Panel Light Configuration dialog box is displayed.

2 From the list boxes, select the required light intensity for the indicator lamps and the
background lamps for the available Palettes. Available light intensities are Bright,
Normal, Dimmed, Very Dimmed and Off.
3 Click the OK button.
The asterisk (*) shows which display palette is currently in use.
You can perform a lamp test by clicking the Lamp Test button.

Lamp test
You can test the panel status lamps, alarm lamps and the audible signal at any time.
To perform the lamp test:
1 Select View →(Panel) Lamp Test, or click the Lamp Test button on the Panel Lamp
Configuration dialog box.
• The Panel Lamp Test dialog box is displayed.

2 Click the Start Lamp Test button.


• The message The Lamp Test has started is displayed (on the dialog box).
• All the panel button status lamps should be lit.
• All the lamps in the ALARMS button group should be lit.
• The audible signal should sound.

58 385575/D
System settings

• The text on the Start Lamp Test button changes to End Lamp Test.
3 Press SILENCE to stop the audible signal sounding.
4 Press, in turn, each button that has a status lamp.
• Each status lamp should extinguish when its associated button is pressed.
5 To stop the test, click the End Lamp Test button.
6 Click the Close button to remove the Panel Lamp Test dialog box.

Presentation Units dialog box


You can select which set of units to use for the display and entry of values. If configured
for your system, you can also specify the presentation units other than those available
in the list.
To display the dialog box, select: View→(Presentation) Units.

Note
Only User Definable display presentation sets can be edited.

Whether the Presentation Units dialog box is shown as a compact version or as an


extended version, depends on the version in which it was shown the last time the dialog
box was closed (i.e. it always opens in the same version as it was in when last closed).
The extended version of the Presentation Units dialog box is resizable. To adjust the
height, place the cursor directly on top of the upper (or lower) edge of the dialog box.
The cursor then changes appearance to a two-headed arrow symbol. You can now drag
the edge of the dialog box (downwards or upwards) until it displays the desired number
of presentation unit types in the set.
Similarly you can resize the width of the dialog box. In addition you can adjust the width
of the Type, Display Format and Unit columns by placing the cursor on top of one of the
column delimiters. The cursor then changes appearance to a two-headed arrow symbol.
You can now drag to change the width of the columns.

385575/D 59
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Editing Presentation Units


To edit the presentation units:
1 Click the Details button on the Presentation Units dialog box.
• The extended version of the Presentation Units dialog box is displayed.

2 Using the scroll bar to the right, find the presentation unit type you want to edit and
select it. It is possible to sort the unit list alphabetically by clicking the column
heading. Click once for ascending order, twice for descending order and three times
to have the default order (no alphabetical sorting) displayed.
3 Click in the Display Format column for the selected presentation unit type.
• A list box containing all the display formats for this type is displayed.
• The presently selected display format is indicated with white text on blue
background.

4 Select the wanted display format from the options shown in the list box by clicking
it.
• The list box is closed.
5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 if you want to edit the display format for another presentation
unit type.
6 Click the OK button.
• The display formats are applied.

60 385575/D
System settings

Vessel and sea current speed


This is applicable for the presentation set of units User Definable 1 and 2.
For vessel and sea current speed there are two display formats for knots, either knots (1
decimal point accuracy) or knots (accurate) (2 decimal points accuracy).
For sea current speed there are also two display formats for meter/second, either
meter/second (1 decimal point accuracy) or meter/second (accurate) (2 decimal points
accuracy).
The rest of the speed units have only one display format.

Wind, waves and sea current direction


This is applicable for the presentation set of units User Definable 1 and 2.
For wind, waves and sea current, it is possible to specify whether the displayed directions
are to be interpreted as “comes from” or “goes to”.
When Goes To is selected, the displayed directions in dialog boxes and views are shown
with “s.” in front of the unit. The “s” means “setting” (goes to).
On display views such as the Posplot view, the arrows indicating wind and current
directions point towards the plot when Comes From is selected, and outwards when
Goes To is selected.

385575/D 61
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Resetting the presentation


To reset the presentation settings to the factory (original) settings:
1 Select View →( Presentation) Reset.
• The Reset presentation dialog box is displayed.

2 Click the OK button if you want to reset all the presentation settings to factory
(original) settings, otherwise click the Cancel button.

Set System Date/Time dialog box


Note
Setting the system date and time can only be performed by the “Chief” user. See
Changing user on page 55.

The Set System Date/Time dialog box allows you to change the date and time of the
system clock.
To display this dialog box, select System→(Date/Time) Set Date/Time.

Use this dialog box to set the correct date and time. You can either enter the time and
date values directly into the text boxes or you can use the up/down arrows to select
time and date values.

Changing display colours


Three sets of display colours (palettes) are available for day or night use. The palette
selection from the Operator Station in command can be applied at all Operator Stations
in the system, or the palette selection can be set individually at each Operator Station.

62 385575/D
System settings

Changing the display palette on Operator Stations that are


not set to have an independent palette selection
You can change the display palette simultaneously at Operator Stations that are not
set to have an independent palette selection. Perform the following procedure at the
Operator Station in command:
1 Ensure that independent palette selection is not selected at the Operator Station
that is in command:
Select View, if (Palette) Independent palette is selected on this sub menu, click
(Palette) Independent palette to deselect it.
2 Select View→(Palette) Day, Dusk or Night to choose the required palette.
• The palette selection is applied to the Operator Stations that are not set to have an
independent palette selection.

Changing the display palette on a single Operator Station


You can change the display palette at a single Operator Station. Perform the following
procedure at the Operator Station that is to have an independent display palette:
1 Ensure that independent palette selection is selected at the Operator Station.
Select View, if (Palette) Independent palette is not selected on this sub menu, click
(Palette) Independent palette to select it.
2 Select View→(Palette) Day, Dusk or Night to choose the required palette.
• The palette selection is applied to the Operator Station.

Alarm Limits dialog box


Position page
To display the dialog box, select Alarms →Position and Heading.

385575/D 63
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

To change the limits, either enter new values directly in the text boxes, or use the up and
down arrow buttons to increase or decrease the current values.
To activate the limits, select the Active check box for Position and Heading. You can
activate either the alarm limit only, or both the warning and alarm limits. You cannot
activate only a warning limit. If you click the Active check box for Warning, the
corresponding alarm limit is also activated.
Note
Warning limits can never be set larger than the corresponding Alarm limits.

Position
Warning and alarm limits can be set for position deviation. When the vessel's
actual position differs from the position setpoint by more than the warning limit, a
warning message is displayed. When the vessel's actual position differs from
the position setpoint by more than the alarm limit, an audible signal sounds and
an alarm message is displayed.
When active, the position limits are displayed as black circles — solid for alarm
and dashed for warning, in the Position Deviation pane. When inactive, the position
limits are shown as gray circles.
Note
In all modes, the position limits are inhibited until a requested change in position
is completed.

Heading
Warning and alarm limits can be set for heading deviation. When the vessel's
actual heading differs from the heading setpoint by more than the warning limit,
a warning message is displayed. When the vessel's actual heading differs from
the heading setpoint by more than the alarm limit, an audible signal sounds and
an alarm message is displayed.
The limits are active only when the yaw axis is under automatic control.
When active, the heading limits are shown as black lines — solid for alarm and
dashed for warning, on the Posplot view (see Posplot view on page 273). When
inactive, the heading limits are shown as gray lines.
Note
In all modes, the heading limits are inhibited until a requested change in heading
is completed.

VRS page
The VRS page allows you to set alarm limits for pitch, roll and heave motion.
To display the dialog box, select Alarms →VRS.

64 385575/D
System settings

Pitch, Roll, Heave


The system monitors the pitch and roll motions of the vessel as measured by the
Vertical Reference Sensors (VRS). If heave measurements are also available from
the VRS, the system also monitors this motion. You can specify maximum alarm
limits for each motion. If an alarm limit is exceeded, an audible signal sounds and
an alarm message is displayed.
To change the limits, either enter new values directly in the text boxes, or use the
up and down arrow buttons to increase or decrease the current values.
To activate the limits, select the Active check boxes.

Gain dialog box


To display the dialog box, select Settings→(Control) Gain.
Alternatively, press the CONTROL SETUP button.
The content of this dialog box will vary according to system configuration. The dialog
box in the system installed on your vessel may display only some of the items shown in
this example.

385575/D 65
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Controller Mode
The option buttons allow you to select from High Precision, Relaxed and Green
controller modes.
The In Use check boxes indicate which controller mode is currently in use by the
system.
High Precision
This is the default controller mode. It is also the controller mode setting if
controller mode selection is not available in the K-Pos DP system installed on
your vessel. Gain level and customised gain settings (if available) apply for this
controller mode.
Relaxed
This controller mode is available in Auto Position and Mixed Joystick system
modes.
Select the radius by clicking the arrows or typing in a value in the Outer Radius
text box. Gain level and customised gain settings (if available) apply for this
controller mode.
If it is not possible to use Relaxed controller mode when it is selected, the High
Precision controller mode will be used.
With Relaxed controller mode, the position gains are modified to vary within the
Relaxed control circle. This means that the force setpoint used to bring the vessel
back to the position setpoint is very low when close to the center of the control
circle. It then increases up to the normal values when close to the border of the
area defined by the radius (the gain varies exponentially within the area).

66 385575/D
System settings

Note
The radius for Relaxed controller mode is not a position limit, it is only the area
within which the controller gains are very low. If the vessel drifts outside this area,
the gains will increase. How far outside the vessel drifts depends on the Gain Level
settings (the high-medium-low predefined controller gain or customised controller
gain in surge, sway and yaw axes).

Green
This controller mode is available in Auto Position system mode.
Select the Outer Radius and Inner Radius by clicking the arrows or typing a value
in the text box.
If it is not possible to use Green when it is selected, the High Precision controller
mode will be used.
The Inner Radius and Outer Radius define the working area and the operational
area, respectively. When the inner radius is predicted to be exceeded, additional
thrust is added in a smoother way than if the outer radius is predicted to be
exceeded.
Note
When changing position and/or heading in Green controller mode, the controller
mode used is automatically temporarily switched to High Precision controller mode.
During a heading change the position carrot is set to the present vessel position.
This prevents unnecessary vessel movement. The controller mode will switch back
to Green controller mode once position and heading become “Present”.
If system selected heading is chosen, the Green controller mode will not be in use.

Gain Level (High Precision/Relaxed)


Gain Level is applicable for High Precision and Relaxed controller modes.
High/Medium/Low
Select the required controller gain level using the High/Medium/Low option
buttons. If available, the gain factors in use for each of the three gain levels are
shown in parentheses. The values in parentheses may vary depending on vessel
configuration.
Customised
This setting is optional. Select this option button when you want to perform
customised settings of the gain level. Selecting Customised will make the
High/Medium/Low option buttons unavailable (they will appear dimmed).
After you have selected Customised you can input the Customisation setting for
gain factors in the Surge, Sway and Yaw axes by clicking the arrows or typing a
new gain factor in the corresponding text box. The currently selected gain factors
in the Surge, Sway and Yaw axes are shown graphically above the numerical values.

385575/D 67
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Speed Constraints (Green)


Speed Constraints are used in Green controller mode to limit the vessel speed. You
can select Speed Constraints for the Surge and/or Sway axes. Speed constraints
should be used while operating within a large area.

Gain Level for High Precision and Relaxed controller mode


There are three predefined controller gain levels available; high, medium and low. The
selected gain level applies to any of the surge, sway and yaw axes when they are under
automatic control and High Precision or Relaxed controller mode is used (see High
Precision and Relaxed control on page 20).
If configured, customised setting of the controller gain level can be performed, with
individual gain factor settings for the surge, sway and yaw axes.
Different gain factors for each of the three standard gain levels are defined to suit the
characteristics of the vessel. The deviations in position, speed, heading and rotation rate
are multiplied by the selected gain factor to obtain the required force setpoint.
The most suitable gain level depends on the vessel characteristics, the weather conditions
and the required positioning accuracy. Operational experience plays a large part in
determining the optimum gain level, but the following general points should also be
noted:
• High gain provides the quickest vessel response, the most accurate manoeuvering,
and the smallest positioning window.
• Medium gain provides a slower vessel response than high gain.
• Low gain provides the slowest vessel response and the largest positioning window.
For all three predefined controller gain levels, and also for the customised gain levels,
the gain factors are reduced when the position deviation is close to zero. Under ideal
conditions (optimum Vessel Model and constant environmental forces), there will be
little difference between the effect of the various gain levels since the position deviation
will be minimal.
Under less than ideal conditions there can be some variation in the vessel position, and
you should set the gain level to control the speed and extent of the variation according to
the general comments given above.

Quick model update


All the forces acting on the vessel that are not measured directly, such as waves and sea
current, together with any errors in the measured forces, are calculated over a period of
time by the Vessel Model, and the appropriate thrust is applied to counteract them (see
K-Pos DP system principles on page 17 for a description of the Vessel Model.) These
unknown forces are presented for the operator as residual, either as current or force.

68 385575/D
System settings

Under normal sea conditions, the major components of the residual force change only
slowly, and the best positioning performance is achieved by calculating them over a
long period of time.
During some operations, significant and rapid changes in residual forces can occur.
For example:
• When manoeuvering in channels, rivers, harbours or around breakwaters, or in areas
with loop current, there may be sudden changes in the current.
• When relatively large forces are not measured accurately, such as the pipe tension in a
pipe-laying operation, there may be sudden errors in the measured forces.
Such sudden changes in the residual forces would normally result in a position offset
which would then be slowly corrected. When selected by the operator, the Quick Model
Update function prepares the system for sudden changes in the residual by adjusting the
mathematical model accordingly and in this way ensures more accurate positioning.
The reaction rate can be specified separately for each axis.
A timer is included so that the Quick Model Update function is automatically switched
off after a specified period.

Quick Model dialog box


To display the dialog box, select Settings→(General) Quick Model.

Enable
Enable or disable the Quick Model Update function.
Duration
The duration of the function, after which it will be automatically switched off.

385575/D 69
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Time left
The timer starts when you select Enable and then click the OK or Apply button. The
Time left field shows the time remaining before the function will be automatically
disabled.
Error gain modification factors
A gain modification factor can be specified for each axis. The factor is specified
as a percentage of the normal reaction to deviation in that axis caused by residual
forces. A larger factor results in a larger reaction and thereby a shorter integration
time for the residual forces.

Rotation Center dialog box


The Rotation Center dialog box allows you to specify the required rotation centre. Up
to 20 rotation centres can be predefined for the vessel in fixed positions relative to the
midships position on the vessel. The coordinates of the required rotation centre can
also be entered manually. The rotation centre can be located anywhere, even outside
the vessel itself.
A suitable configuration of thrusters must be enabled. For example, if you want the
vessel to rotate about the aft part of the vessel, there must be at least one thruster enabled
forward of the vessel center.
If thrusters are disabled so that the selected rotation centre no longer can be applied, the
rotation centre in use will automatically be changed.
Midships is the default rotation center and is used when the following message is shown:

During Joystick mode you can change the rotation centre between fore, midships and
aft, i.e. the rotation centre is selected and in use. You can also select any of the other
predefined rotation centres, but they will only be selected and become in use when
the position is under automatic control — in Auto mode or mixed Joystick mode with
automatic surge and sway.
During Auto mode or Joystick mode with automatic surge/sway you can change the
rotation centre between all predefined or manually entered rotation centres.
When automatic position control is active, the rotation centre can only be changed when
the position and heading modes are PRESENT.
To display the dialog box, select Settings→(Control) Rotation Center.

70 385575/D
System settings

Select Rotation Center


The available rotation centres are displayed in the Select Rotation Center field.
Select a rotation centre by clicking the appropriate option button. When a
predefined rotation centre is selected, its coordinates are displayed in the Ahead
and STBD boxes.
If Other is selected, the drop-down list box, from which you can select among
predefined rotation centres, becomes available, and the dialog box is enlarged
to show a Preview display. The intersection of the horizontal and vertical lines
on the Preview on the Rotation Center dialog box marks the midships position
on the vessel.

385575/D 71
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

When a rotation centre is selected in the drop-down list box, its coordinates are
displayed in the Ahead/Astern and STBD/PORT boxes and in the Preview display.
All coordinates are measured relative to the midships position.
If User Defined is selected in the drop-down list box, the coordinates of the required
rotation centre can be entered directly in the Ahead/Astern and STBD/PORT boxes.
In Use
The In Use boxes show the coordinates of the currently active rotation centre in the
Ahead/Astern and STBD/PORT axes.
Preview
An orange circle on the Preview display shows the position of the currently-active
rotation centre (In Use). A blue circle shows the position of the proposed rotation
centre (Selected). When the selected rotation centre becomes in use (the Apply
button is clicked), the two circles have the same position:

72 385575/D
Joystick

Joystick

This section contains the following topics:


Joystick Settings dialog box ............................................................................................73
Rotation centre for joystick manoeuvring........................................................................75
Joystick Calibrate dialog box...........................................................................................77

Joystick Settings dialog box


The Joystick Settings dialog box allows you to adjust the following settings:
• Joystick thrust
• Joystick precision
• Environmental compensation
• Current update
To display the dialog box, select Settings→(Modes) Joystick or press the JOYSTICK
SETUP button.

Thrust
These option buttons allow you to select either Full or Reduced thrust.
Full
The maximum force available from all thrusters can be used. This increases the
vessel's response to movement of the joystick compared to the Reduced option.

385575/D 73
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Reduced
The maximum applied thruster force for axes that are under joystick control is
limited to about 50% of the available force from all thrusters.
The joystick thrust setting can also be changed by pressing the JOY. FULL
THRUST button. The status for the joystick thrust setting will be dynamically
updated on the Joystick Settings dialog box to reflect this change.
Precision
The applied thruster force for axes that are under joystick control can be scaled in
various ways. This scaling gives a different response to movement of the joystick,
depending on the configuration and operational requirements of the vessel. Figure
12 displays thrust as a function of joystick deflection in the cases of Full and
Reduced thrust, with High speed, General or Low speed precision.

Figure 12 Joystick response characteristics

The option buttons allow you to select from High speed, General or Low speed
precision.
High speed
For precise high-speed manoeuvring. At small movements of the joystick the
change in thruster force is large, but decreases with increasing movements.
General
Linear relationship between movement of the joystick and force exerted by the
thrusters. The Precision is automatically changed from High speed to General when
changing from high speed to low speed manoeuvring (for example from Autopilot
mode to Joystick mode).
Low speed
For precise low-speed manoeuvring. Progressive relationship between movement
of the joystick and force exerted by the thrusters. At small movements of

74 385575/D
Joystick

the joystick the change in thruster force is low, but increases with increasing
movements.
Exponent
This shows the exponent used in the calculation of thrust for the currently selected
Precision option. This is for information only.
Envir. Comp.
The check boxes allow you to combine joystick control with environmental
compensation separately for each of the Surge, Sway and Yaw axes. The system
then automatically compensates for the wind forces acting on the vessel by
providing the thrusters with the necessary extra thrust in the appropriate direction.
When position-reference system measurements are available, the system will
calculate the unknown forces, including sea current and wave forces, which are
acting on the vessel (collectively referred to as “current”) and perform automatic
compensation for these forces.
Environmental compensation is always performed when selected, but the
compensation due to “current” forces is zero if no position-reference system has
been accepted or if Current Upd. is not selected.
Current Upd.
Current Update is enabled by default. You must clear the required Surge/Sway/Yaw
check boxes if you do not want the system to compensate for the calculated
residual forces for axes under joystick control.
Compensating for residual forces when under joystick control normally increases
the system performance when entering automatic control. However, there can be
situations where the calculated residual forces are no longer valid for the new
operational condition. A typical example would be when entering automatic
control after a period using thrusters to hold the vessel against a quay.

Rotation centre for joystick manoeuvring


When the vessel is in Joystick or Mixed Joystick/Auto mode, it is possible to specify
that the vessel should rotate about the fore or aft part of the vessel instead of Midships
which is the default. This feature can be useful when leaving or approaching another
vessel or a fixed structure such as a quay.
Note
In Joystick mode the vessel will not rotate accurately around the selected rotation center.
This is because position control is not used in Joystick mode.

385575/D 75
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

For example, when manoeuvring alongside a quay which lies


to starboard, you may want to move the stern of the vessel in
towards the quay without the bow moving out, while at the same
time applying a small thrust to starboard. This would be difficult
when using Midships as the rotation centre. By selecting the
fore part of the vessel as the rotation centre, you can easily use
the joystick both to rotate the vessel counter-clockwise about
the bow and to move the vessel to starboard as illustrated here.
Only rotation centres that are intended for use during joystick
manoeuvring can be activated in Joystick mode.
A suitable configuration of thrusters must be enabled. For
example, if you want the vessel to rotate about the aft part of the
vessel, there must be at least one thruster enabled forward of the vessel centre.
In Joystick mode you can specify a rotation centre for use in automatic mode, but the
selection will not be effective until an automatic mode is selected.
If thrusters are disabled so that the selected rotation centre no longer can be applied, the
rotation centre in use will automatically be changed.
In mixed Joystick mode the system will, if possible, use the Fore, Midships or Aft
rotation centre, but the position setpoint will be at the operator-specified rotation centre.
The position controller may then force the vessel to rotate around the operator-specified
rotation centre. We will clarify this with an example.
Assume that the vessel is in Auto Position
mode with an operator-specified rotation
centre different from Fore, Midships or Aft.
The operator then disables automatic yaw
control and uses the joystick to command
the vessel to rotate counter-clockwise. The
joystick control in yaw will try to rotate
the vessel around Midships, but the position
control will work in such a way as to keep the
vessel at its position setpoint. The vessel may
then be forced to rotate around the position
setpoint as shown in this figure.

76 385575/D
Joystick

Joystick Calibrate dialog box


Note
Calibrating the joystick can only be performed by the “Chief” user (see Changing user
on page 55), and only when the system is in Standby mode.

Calibration of the joystick ensures that a certain deflection of the joystick corresponds to
a specific thrust, depending on Joystick Settings.
It is necessary to calibrate the joystick when:
• New hardware has been installed or parts of the hardware (for example the joystick)
have been changed.
• New software has been installed or software has been reinstalled from a disk.
The Joystick Calibrate dialog box contains a description of how to calibrate the joystick.
To display this dialog box, select Tools→Calibrate joystick.

Calibrating the joystick


To calibrate the joystick:
1 Ensure that the system is in Standby mode.
2 Select Tools→Calibrate Joystick.
• The Joystick Calibrate dialog box is displayed.
• A figure indicating the joystick axes is displayed on the dialog box.
3 Set the joystick in ZERO position and click the In Zero Position button.
• A red mark appears on the zero position on the figure.

385575/D 77
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

4 Move the joystick for MIN/MAX in the three axes to register joystick swing.
• Black lines appear on the figure to indicate joystick swing in all three axes.
5 To change the joystick deadband, click the Deadband button.
• The Deadband dialog box is displayed.

6 Enter the required deadband in all three axes by typing values or by clicking the
up/down arrows and then click the OK button.
7 Click the OK button on the Joystick Calibrate dialog box to complete the calibration.
• A dialog box, stating that the new calibration values will be saved, is displayed.
8 Click the OK button.
• The joystick is calibrated.

78 385575/D
Message system

Message system

This section contains the following topics:


System diagnostics...........................................................................................................79
Operational checks...........................................................................................................79
Message priority...............................................................................................................80
Presentation of messages .................................................................................................81
Alarm states .....................................................................................................................85
Acknowledging messages................................................................................................86
Alarm lamps.....................................................................................................................87
Messages on the printer ...................................................................................................88
Message explanations — online help ..............................................................................89
Operator advice messages................................................................................................90

System diagnostics
The following methods are used for fault detection:
• Built-In System Test (BIST) that performs a comprehensive system test at power-on.
• Built-In Test Equipment (BITE) that continually checks for internal system faults
when the system is running.
• Additional self-checking facilities for system components such as I/O units.
• Supervision of the controller computer fan and temperature.
• Comparison of data with preset maximum and minimum limits.
• Consistency checking of input (e.g. input from triangular potentiometer).
• Supervision of the serial lines (e.g. timeout, baud rate, framing error, checksum
and format).
Any faults are reported.

Operational checks
The following checks are continuously carried out during system operation:

385575/D 79
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

• Detection of possible degraded performance of the K-Pos DP system (e.g. thruster


not ready, insufficient thrust, demand reduced by blackout prevention, heading out of
limits, position out of limits, etc.).
• Logical checking of information (e.g. taut wire; difference between measured and
expected wire length exceeds limit).
• Comparison of data with preset maximum and minimum limits.
• Comparison of received data with expected values calculated by the mathematical
model.
• Comparison of thruster setpoint and feedback signals. Discrepancies exceeding preset
limits are handled as a fault.
• Consistency checking between similar sensors.
In dual- and triple-redundant systems, comparison checks are also done for
the position/heading setpoints and estimates, reference-system origin, used
position-reference systems, target transponders and other sensors.
Detected faults, discrepancies and advice are reported to the operator, enabling the
appropriate operational actions to be taken and, if necessary, initiation of relevant
repair procedures.

Audible and visual indications


All messages are presented as text in dedicated display areas. Audible signals and
flashing panel lights are used according to the message priority. The operator can select a
view showing all current messages in the system at any time. Audible signals may be
silenced without acknowledgement of the message. Unacknowledged messages have a
flashing marker in the display areas.

Message priority
There are four categories of messages, depending on their severity:
• Emergency (audible signal and flashing light)
• Alarms (audible signal and flashing light)
• Warnings (flashing light)
• Information
Emergency, alarm and warning messages must be acknowledged by the operator.
• Emergency messages
Emergency messages are generated in response to critical system faults such as
over-temperature or power supply failure.
All emergency messages must be critically examined to determine their cause and
effect.

80 385575/D
Message system

• Alarm messages
Alarm messages are generated when conditions are detected that critically affect the
capability or performance of the system (such as a system fault or a defined alarm
limit exceeded).
All Alarm messages must be critically examined to determine their cause and effect.
• Warning messages
Warning messages inform you of the occurrence of conditions in the system that,
if ignored, could result in unwanted system response or eventual failure (such as
incorrect operator actions, intermittent position-reference data or a defined warning
limit exceeded).
• Information messages
Information messages inform you of conditions that are noteworthy, but that have no
serious effect on the performance of the system.
Emergency and Alarm messages are accompanied by an audible signal which continues
until you acknowledge the message. There are no audible signals associated with
Warning or Information messages.
Emergency, Alarm and Warning messages are accompanied by the relevant lamp flashing
in the ALARMS button group until you acknowledge the message.
If the system tests do not report the same message within a timeout period (usually
20 seconds), the message becomes inactive. Inactive Emergency, Alarm and Warning
messages must be acknowledged before they are removed from the top bar and the
Dynamic Alarm Page. They will remain displayed with the state Normal in the Dynamic
Event and Historic Event Pages.
Explanations can be obtained for any of the messages generated by the controller process
stations, see Message explanations — online help on page 89.

Presentation of messages
System messages are colour coded in the following ways:
• Emergency messages are displayed on red background.
• Alarm messages are displayed on red background.
• Warning messages are displayed on yellow background.
• Information messages are displayed on grey background.
The messages are presented in two different displays: on the top bar and on the Event
List view. The presentation of events is subjected to filtering. Only those events that
match all attributes specified in the filter are included in the presentation. System-defined
filters are provided which cannot be changed by the operator.
• The Alarm presentation on the top bar always shows the most recent Emergency,
Alarm or Warning message that has not yet been acknowledged.

385575/D 81
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Figure 13 Alarm presentation on the top bar

• The Event List view contains a list of all the current system messages. By pressing
the ALARM VIEW button, you can display the Event List view.

Figure 14 Example Event List view

(First column)
If you have not yet acknowledged a message, an asterisk (*) is displayed and the
background colour is displayed flashing (see Acknowledging messages on page 86
for more information).
A vertical bar (|) is displayed in the place of the asterisk for an unacknowledged
message that is in a command group over which the operator station does not
have control.
Time
Time and date when the message was first reported.
Origin
Identifies the originator (source) of the message:
• DP-OS# – Operator station
• DpMain – Controller PS group
• Equipment – Equipment monitoring system
Member
Members of the originator of the message (not relevant when the originator is an
Operator Station or a controller PS group with only one member).
If the message is from a controller PS group with more than one process station, this
column identifies the members of the group. It may contain up to three characters,
depending on the redundancy level. For example, for a triple-redundant system:
ABC The message was reported by all three process stations and is still
active.
C The message was reported only by process station C and is still
active.
-B The message was reported by process stations A and B. The message
from process station A is now inactive.
--- The message was reported by all three process stations and is now
inactive (but is not yet acknowledged).

82 385575/D
Message system

Tag
Identifies the source of process events and system events.
Priority
Message priority: Emergency, Alarm, Warning or Info (Information).
State
The state of the Event: High, HighHigh, HighScale, Low, LowLow, LowScale
(here all these are commonly referred to as Active), Normal or Void (see also
Alarm states on page 85).
• High — Indicates that the alarm condition is present.
• Normal — Indicates that the alarm condition is no longer present.
Text
Message text.
Additional information
Up to three blocks of additional data may be included in the message. The meaning
of this additional data varies for each message. See Message explanations —
online help on page 89.
(Event pages)
You can choose among the following Event pages:
Dynamic Alarm Page
The Dynamic Alarm Page shows a list of the most recent messages. The Dynamic
Alarm Page has a limited length; as the list is filled up, the oldest messages are
pushed out while the most recent ones are added to the top of the list. Messages
where the underlying condition is no longer present are displayed with the state
Normal.
Messages can be acknowledged on the Dynamic Alarm Page. Acknowledged
messages where the underlying condition is no longer present are removed from
the Dynamic Alarm Page.
Use the Dynamic Alarm Page to get a survey of the current alarm situation.
Historic Event Page
The Historic Event Page provides a log of all messages that occur. Within the limits
of the event database, you can define the time span to be covered by the Historic
Event Page. While a message can appear only once on the Dynamic Alarm page, it
appears as many times on the historic page as there are changes in its state.
Use the Historic Event Page whenever you need to analyse the evolution of events.
If the list extends beyond the window area of the display, you can use the up/down
arrows in the tool bar.

385575/D 83
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Dynamic Event Page


The Dynamic Event Page shows a list of the most recent messages. The Dynamic
Event Page has a limited length; as the list is filled up, the oldest messages are
pushed out while the most recent ones are added to the top of the list. While a
message can appear only once on the Dynamic Alarm page, it appears as many
times on the Dynamic Event Page as there are changes in its state. Acknowledged
messages where the underlying condition is no longer present remain displayed
with the state Void.
Use the Dynamic Event Page to get a survey of the current event situation.
Note
Messages cannot be acknowledged on the Historic Event Page or on the Dynamic
Event Page.

Defining the time span for the Historic Event Page


The Date And Time dialog box allows you to define the time span for the events displayed
on the Historic Event Page.
To display this dialog box, click the button in the tool bar of the Event List view
(Historic Event Page).

Most recent time


The time span is defined relative to a specified date and time. The “most recent
time” is the reference. This group box contains controls for setting the most recent
time.
Now
Clicking this button sets the fields for Most recent time to the present time.
You can specify a date and time by using the calendar, and entering the required
time in the Hour, Min: and Sec: text boxes.

84 385575/D
Message system

And time span backwards


The time span is defined in days, hours, minutes and seconds backwards in time.
Type in the required values in the Days:, Hours:, Min: and Sec: text boxes.

Alarm states
Digital alarms are either “Active” (the underlying condition is present) or “Inactive” (the
underlying condition is no longer present).
Inactive digital alarms are presented with the status “Normal” on all three pages of the
Event List view. Inactive, acknowledged digital alarms are presented with the status
“Void” on the Dynamic Event Page and the Historic Event Page. Active digital alarms
are presented with the status High on all three pages of the Event List view.
For alarms on analog terminals, however, the Active state is further refined by means of
alarm limits. Figure 15 shows the relation between the alarm limits and the validity of
alarms states.

Figure 15 Alarm states


High process values

HighScale
HighScale Limit
HighHigh Active
HighHigh Limit
High
Alarm limits

High Limit
Normal/Void Inactive
Low Limit
Low
LowLow Limit
LowLow Active
LowScale Limit
LowScale

Low process values


Explanation of the arrow symbol
The alarm state is valid from and including this limit.

CD3248 The alarm state is valid t o, but not including this limit.

An analog alarm is in the Normal/Void state when the terminal value is within the High
and Low alarm limits. This means that the alarm is Inactive.
The alarm becomes Active when the terminal value exceeds the High/Low limits.
Any change in the alarm state is indicated in the Status cell for that message in the
Event List view.

385575/D 85
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Acknowledging messages
You can acknowledge either all visible messages or individual messages selected on the
Event List view (see Figure 14 on page 82).
When a message has been acknowledged, and the message is reported as inactive by
all the controller process stations, it is removed from the message list. If this results in
“gaps” in the list displayed in the Event List view, you can remove these “gaps” by
selecting Refresh on the Event List shortcut menu (see Figure 16), by clicking the refresh
button on the toolbar, or by closing and reopening the Event List view.
You can acknowledge messages in the following ways:
• Press the ACK button.
• Click on the alarm icon on the top bar.
• Click the button in the tool bar of the Event List view.
• Place the cursor in the Event List view, click the right trackball button to display the
following shortcut menu, and then select Ack All.

Figure 16 Event List shortcut menu

To acknowledge all visible current messages in the Event List view:


1 Press the ALARM VIEW panel button.
• The Dynamic Alarm Page of the Event List view is displayed.
2 Click the right trackball button to display the shortcut menu, and then click Select All.
• The font of the message texts changes to bold.
3 Press the ACK button or click Ack on the shortcut menu.
• All visible messages are acknowledged.
To acknowledge a selection of messages:
1 Press the ALARM VIEW button.
• The Event List view is displayed.
2 Select a group of consecutive messages by dragging the cursor over the asterisks
in the left column.
• The font of the message texts changes to bold.
3 Press the ACK button or select Ack on the shortcut menu as described above.
• The messages are acknowledged.

86 385575/D
Message system

Silence button
You can press the SILENCE button at any time to silence the audible signal
(without acknowledging the Emergency or Alarm message that caused it).
The audible signal will sound again if another Emergency or Alarm message
is reported.
An audible signal can normally be silenced from any of the Operator Stations in question.
However, system alarms can only be silenced from the originating Operator Station.
For example, when an Operator Station becomes “not communicational” several other
Operator Stations may detect the situation and notify it by means of an audible signal.
The audible signal must be silenced on every OS that notifies the situation.

Alarm lamps
There are three alarm lamps:
• POWER
This lamp is lit green as long as the power supply to the operator panel is OK.
• FAULT
This lamp is lit red when the contact between the operator panel and the Operator
Station computer is lost, else it is off.
Note
This lamp does not indicate failures in the controller process station(s). If the
Operator Station loses contact with the controller process station, a message is
displayed in a message dialog box.

ALARM
This lamp flashes in response to a software-generated Emergency, Alarm or Warning
message from the Operator Station computer; for example, heading or position
deviation beyond limits or sensor error. These messages are generated by the
controller process station and do not indicate failures in the Operator Station. A
flashing lamp indicates unacknowledged messages. A continuously lit lamp indicates
that all messages are acknowledged. The lamp will extinguish three seconds after the
last Emergency, Alarm or Warning status has been removed.

Indications of errors related to the ALARMS button group


Errors that are related to the ALARMS button group (and subsequently the indication of
system events) are indicated in the following ways:

385575/D 87
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

• If the ALARMS button group stops functioning so that the lamps and audible signal do
not work, a dialog box with the message Operator panel error — No audible and visual
Alarms Indicators is displayed. The dialog box is alternately displayed (for three
seconds) and hidden (for seven seconds). The dialog box will not be shown during the
first minute after the K-Pos DP system has been started.
• If the ALARMS button group loses its power, the lamps in the ALARMS group become
unlit, and a buzzer starts to sound.
• If the ALARMS button group has power, but does not get contact with the OS
computer within four minutes after the K-Pos DP system has been started, a buzzer
will start to sound and the FAULT and ALARM lamps will become lit.
• If the ALARMS button group loses contact with the OS computer, a buzzer will start
to sound and the FAULT and ALARM lamps will become lit.

Messages on the printer


When an Emergency, Alarm or Warning message is first reported by the system, becomes
inactive or is acknowledged, it is printed out on the event printer connected to the
Operator Station. The print-out frequency depends on the installed printer solution (for
example: immediately, one message at a time, when a batch of messages fills out a
whole page, or on request).
The format of the printed messages is the same as for the Event List view (see
Presentation of messages on page 81), except that each message is preceded by a
sequence number. Each new message is given a new sequence number. Whenever a
message changes state, it is printed again with the same sequence number.

Event Printer dialog box


When the Event Printer is configured as a page printer, the Emergency, Alarm and
Warning messages are not printed directly but are saved in a buffer. The Event Printer
dialog box allows you to print out all the unprinted events in the buffer.
To display the dialog box, select System→(Printer Settings) Event Printer.

Printer name
The name of the event printer.

88 385575/D
Message system

Printer type
The type of the event printer.
Unprinted events
The number of unprinted messages in the event printer buffer.
Refresh
Click this button to update the information shown in the dialog box.
Flush
Click this button to print all of the unprinted events on the event printer.
Purge
Click this button to remove some or all of the unprinted events on the event printer.

Message explanations — online help


Using the Help system, explanations can be obtained for any of the messages generated
by the controller process stations. Explanations of Command, Equipment and Internal
messages are not available.
The Help system can be opened in the following ways:

• When a message is not acknowledged and is shown on the top bar — click the
icon.
• Whenever a message is displayed in the Event List view, point to the message and
click the right trackball button. A shortcut menu is displayed. Click Help on this menu.
The System Messages Help is opened with the relevant message explanation displayed.
• On the System menu, click Messages. The System messages Help is displayed. This
Help system allows you to select the required message from a list of Contents. You
can also Search for the required message by searching for words or phrases that are
contained in the message or the message explanation.
It may occur that the Help selection is not available on the shortcut menu which is
displayed when you right-click the message in the Event List view. In this case the
explanation can still be obtained via the menu →System →Messages and select it from the
Contents list or using the Search facility.
An example of displayed explanation:

385575/D 89
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Note
The Corrective actions in the message explanations provides only general advice. You
must evaluate the required action according to the current operational situation.

Operator advice messages


As and when applicable, operator advice messages are superimposed across the centre of
the colour display in a pop-up window.
These messages are displayed if a button is pressed when the operator station is not in
command of the system or an attempt is made to select a function that is not allowed in
the current system mode or with the currently displayed dialog box.
There are three categories of operator advice messages, each indicated by an icon:

90 385575/D
Message system

Alarm (Stop)

Warning

Information

A typical example of each type of operator advice message is shown in Figure 17.

Figure 17 Operator advice message examples

385575/D 91
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Starting operations

This section contains the following topics:


System start-up/shut-down and OS stop/restart...............................................................92
Logon Configuration dialog box......................................................................................93
Command transfer............................................................................................................95
Command Control dialog box..........................................................................................96
Connect dialog box ........................................................................................................102

System start-up/shut-down and OS


stop/restart
The K-Pos DP controller cabinet and Operator Stations are usually left with the power
on and with the system in Standby mode.
Placement and naming of switches used in system start-up and shut-down procedures
will vary depending on the hardware installed.
If the system has been shut down, use the procedure in the System Maintenance
Information document for your vessel to restart the system.

Stop/Restart dialog box


With the Stop/Restart dialog box, you can perform the following tasks at your Operator
Station:
• Stop the OS software and leave the Windows session running.
• Restart the OS software with the Windows session running.
• Shutdown the Windows session (and thus also stop the OS software).
• Reboot the Windows session (and thus also stop and restart the OS software).
Reboot the Operator Station if the system is not performing as required, for example:
• Display views are not updated (i.e. numerical values, heading and position do not
change).
• The Operator Station does not respond to operator input.
Any of these options should be performed on one Operator Station at a time to facilitate
operation and monitoring of the K-Pos DP system from other Operator Stations.

92 385575/D
Starting operations

Caution
Some of the options you can perform on this dialog box are not part of
the normal operating procedures for the K-Pos DP system. They are
implemented to facilitate service and installation work performed by trained
personnel from Kongsberg Maritime.

To display the dialog box, select System→Stop/Restart.

Select Option
Shutdown
Stop the OS software, shut down the Windows session and turne off the computer.
Reboot (with OS Restart)
Stop the OS software, reboot the Windows session and restart the OS software.
Note
Avoid restarting the Operator Station by switching the power off and on. It may be
damaging to the Windows file system.

Restarting the system


The K-Pos DP controller cabinet and Operator Stations are usually left with the power
on and with the system in Standby mode.
Placement and naming of switches used in system start-up and shut-down procedures
will vary depending on the hardware installed.
If the system has been shut down, use the procedure in the System Maintenance
Information manual delivered for your vessel to restart the system.

Logon Configuration dialog box


The Logon Configuration dialog box enables you to perform the following tasks on
your Operator Station:
• Select between user logon and auto logon.

385575/D 93
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

• Select/change the shell to be used when logging on (typically either Microsoft


Windows or the OS software).
Caution
Use of this dialog box is not part of the normal operating procedures for the
K-Pos DP system. It is implemented to facilitate service and installation work
performed by trained personnel from Kongsberg Maritime.

Depending on the shell used on your Operator Station, you can display the Logon
Configuration dialog box either by selecting AutoStart under the K-Pos DP command
on the Start menu (only when using Microsoft Windows as shell), or when performing
autostart of the K-Pos DP system. During autostart, a countdown dialog box is launched.
Clicking the button on this countdown dialog box within the countdown limit, displays
the Logon Configuration dialog box.

User Logon
Select this option button if the user is required to log on manually each time the
system is started.
Logon Profile
Auto Logon
Select this option button if automatic logon is to be configured and performed each
time the system is started. This is the normal logon configuration.
Shell
Drop-down list box where you can select which shell configuration to use when
logging on, either Microsoft Windows or the OS software. The OS software is
the normal shell configuration.
Apply and Logoff
Clicking this button after having selected a new shell configuration will quickly
restart the system with the new shell configuration.

94 385575/D
Starting operations

Command transfer
Depending on the system configuration, more than one Operator Station can be connected
simultaneously to one controller process station (PS) group as described in Connect
dialog box on page 102. For example, the Main controller PS group (which in turn
controls the vessel's propulsion system), can be controlled from a K-Pos DP Operator
Station, an Operator Station in integrated systems, or a remote operator terminal. All
the available information about the propulsion system is available at all the connected
Operator Stations, but only one Operator Station can be in command at any time.
All the Operator Stations have TAKE and GIVE buttons. On the Operator Station that
has command of the Main controller PS group, the TAKE button is lit and Main:DP is
displayed on the top bar.
There are two methods for switching command between Operator Stations that are
connected to the same controller PS group:
• Take Command
• Give Command
The system command configuration determines whether or not the “Take Command”
method can be used. The “Take” and “Give” actions apply only for the controller PS
group to which the Operator Station is connected.
In the following example procedures, both DP-OS1 and DP-OS2 are connected to the
Main controller PS group, DP-OS1 currently has command of this group, and command
is to be transferred to DP-OS2.

Taking command
Note
This procedure can be used only if allowed by the system command configuration.
As an alternative, the TAKE button may be configured to start a request command, see
Requesting command on page 96.

1 DP-OS1 is in command.
• The TAKE button status lamp on DP-OS1 is lit.
• No button status lamps in the COMMAND group are lit on DP-OS2.
2 To take command at DP-OS2, press the TAKE button on DP-OS2 twice within
four seconds.
3 DP-OS2 is now in command.
• The TAKE button status lamp on DP-OS2 is lit.
• No button status lamps in the COMMAND group are lit on DP-OS1.

Giving command
1 DP-OS1 is in command.

385575/D 95
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

• The TAKE button status lamp on DP-OS1 is lit.


• No button status lamps in the COMMAND group are lit on DP-OS2.
2 Press the GIVE button on DP-OS1.
• The TAKE button status lamps on all Operator Stations that are connected to
this controller PS group flash.
• An audible signal sounds at all Operator Stations which are included in the
controller PS group.
3 If preferred, press the SILENCE button to stop the audible signal from sounding.
4 To accept command at DP-OS2, press the TAKE button on DP-OS2 twice within
four seconds.
5 DP-OS2 is now in command.
• The TAKE button status lamp on DP-OS2 is lit.
• No button status lamps in the COMMAND group are lit on DP-OS1.
• The audible signal is silenced.
If the offered command transfer is not accepted within one minute, then DP-OS1 remains
in command.
If command has not already been taken by another Operator Station, the offered
command transfer can be cancelled during the timeout period by pressing the TAKE
button on DP-OS1.

Requesting command
Note
The procedure can only be used if allowed by the system configuration.

1 On the requesting OS press the TAKE button. The GIVE buttons on both requesting
OS and OS in command start to flash and the horn on the OS in command sounds.
2 On the OS in command press the GIVE button. The command is transferred.
Note
If you press TAKE on the OS in command, the request will be cancelled.
If no action is taken within 60 seconds, the request will be automatically cancelled.

Command Control dialog box


Note
As a general rule it is recommended to use the operator panel buttons to take or give
command control.

96 385575/D
Starting operations

The Command Control dialog box shows the current command control status and allows
you take or give control of the K-Pos DP system.
This dialog box has three pages, one page with the name of the Operator Station (in this
example DP-OS1), Overview, and Give. The DP-OS1 page is referred to as “the DP-OS
page” and some elements are present on all three pages.
The information available from the Command Control dialog box is mainly intended for
operation of systems with several Operator Stations.
The Command Control dialog box provides some opportunities not available from
panel buttons.
The Command Control dialog box is designed to correspond to the equivalent dialog box
in the K-Chief system where it is more frequently used. This has been done to improve
the user interface, especially on vessels with integrated automation systems on board.
To display this dialog box, press the STATUS button on the panel or the command group
button, e.g. Main: DP, on the top bar.

DP-OS page

Command Group
All command groups are listed in this column. Only DP and DP(Sim) are of interest
for the K-Pos DP system.
Status
Using the text In Command, this column displays the command groups over which
this Operator Station has control.

385575/D 97
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Modified
Displays the time the command control state of the command groups was last
changed by this Operator Station.
Privileges
Displays the Operator Station's privileges for each command group. Takeable is the
only one of interest for the K-Pos DP system. “Takeable” means that an Operator
Station can take command of the command group in question without acceptance
from the Operator Station that was originally in command.

Overview page
To display the Overview page, click the Overview page tab.

Command Group
All Command groups are listed in this column.
In Command
Displays the Operator Station that is in command.
Modified
Displays the time when the command control state was last changed by any
Operator Station. This may be different from the time displayed for the same
command group on the DP-OS page as it shows the time the command control state
was last changed by the Operator Station that you are at.
Command Locations
Displays the Operator Stations that can take command of each command group.
The asterisks (*) means that the Operator Station can take command without
acceptance. This is usually the case for Operator Stations in K-Pos DP systems.

98 385575/D
Starting operations

Give page

To OS Group:
Displays the Operator Station(s) to which command can be transferred.
Give Command of:
Clicking a DP-OS in the To OS Group list, causes a list of all the command groups
over which the Operator Station you are at (here DP-OS1) currently has command,
to be displayed in this field.

Command Groups
In IAS systems, the functionality is divided into Command groups that reflect the way
in which the system will be operated. Each of these Command groups will usually
represent a specific process area, for example, Ballast, Power, Propulsion, Propulsion
Simulation, etc.
All the available information about the command groups is available at all the connected
Operator Stations, but, for each Command group, only one Operator Station can be
in command at any time.
For K-Pos DP purposes, DP and DP(Sim) are the relevant Command groups, and “Take
Command”, “Request Command” and “Give Command” are the relevant command
transfer actions.
DP
The Operator Station that controls this Command group, controls the vessel's
propulsion system. All Operator Stations can take command of DP.

385575/D 99
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

DP(Sim)
A simulation session can be performed on the Operator Station that controls this
Command group.
A training or simulation session can be performed on the Operator Station that
controls this Command group (provided that the requirements stated in Trainer
functions on page 253 are met).
For K-Pos DP operations only the DP and DP(Sim) command groups are of interest. You
select a command group by clicking its identifier in the Command Group list.
There is a folder icon for each command group. The folder icons are colour coded and
have their presentation changed to indicate the current status of each command group.
• Red, closed folder — Uncontrolled, critical command group.
• White, closed folder — Uncontrolled command group.
• Grey, closed folder — Another Operator Station is in control of the command group.
• Green, open folder — This Operator Station (here DP-OS1) is in control of the
command group.

Controls and indicators


The command transfer controls are divided in three groups, TAKE, GIVE and STATUS.
Each group contains a lamp, a text field and a button.
Lamps
Text Fields
Buttons

For K-Pos DP systems, when the dialog box is open, pressing STATUS on the operator
panel closes the dialog box.
The following descriptions of controls and indicators uses DP-OS1 as an example.
Lamps
TAKE
• Lit on DP-OS1 when DP-OS1 is in command.
• Not lit on DP-OS1 when another OS is in command.
• Flashes until DP-OS1 accepts when DP-OS1 is offered command, or during the
timeout period of one minute.
• Flashes while DP-OS1 is giving command to another Operator Station, until the
other Operator Station accepts, or during the timeout period of one minute.
GIVE
• Flashes while DP-OS1 is giving command to another Operator Station, until the
other Operator Station accepts, or during the timeout period of one minute.
Text fields and buttons
The text fields display the command transfer action that will be performed when
the related button is clicked.

100 385575/D
Starting operations

TAKE button and text field


The TAKE button is unavailable when DP-OS1 is in command or when no
command group is selected for command transfer.
The messages that may appear in the text field are as follows:
• Take...
Default on the Give page. Clicking the TAKE button displays the DP-OS1 or
Overview page, depending on which was last used.
• Take
Appears above the TAKE button on the DP-OS page when an uncontrolled
command group or a command group currently under command of another
Operator Station is selected. Clicking the TAKE button transfers the command
to DP-OS1.
• Cancel Give...
Appears above the TAKE button when a Give request is initiated. Clicking the
TAKE button cancels the Give request.
• Accept Give...
Appears above the TAKE button when a Give request is received. Clicking the
TAKE button accepts a Give request and transfers command to DP-OS1.
GIVE button and text field
The messages that may appear in the text field are as follows:
• Give...
Default on the DP-OS and Overview pages. Clicking the GIVE button displays
the Give page.
• Give selected...
Appears above the GIVE button on the DP-OS and Overview pages when
“Giveable” command groups are selected. Clicking the GIVE button the
displays the Give page.
• Start Give Transfer
Appears above the GIVE button on the Give page when “Giveable” command
groups are selected. By clicking the GIVE button you start a Give transfer of
the selected command groups.
• Reject Give
Appears above the GIVE button when a Give request is received. Clicking the
GIVE button rejects the Give request.
STATUS button and text field
For K-Pos DP systems, the message that may appear in the text field is:
• Close
Default above the STATUS button on all three pages. Clicking the STATUS
button closes the dialog box.

385575/D 101
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Connect dialog box


A “controller PS group” is a group of one or more K-Pos DP controller process stations.
The controller PS groups available depend on your system configuration:
• Main — the main controller PS group
• MainSimulator — the controller PS group for training and simulating sessions
(optional)
An operator station can be connected to only one controller PS group at a time. Your
system configuration determines the controller PS groups to which each operator station
can connect.
Several operator stations can be connected simultaneously to a controller PS group, but
only one of these operator stations can be in command. See Taking command on page 95.
If an operator station is not in command of a controller PS group, you can connect that
operator station to any available group at any time. However, if the operator station has
command of a controller PS group, the system on these controllers must be in Standby
mode before you can connect the operator station to a different group.
The Connect dialog box allows you to connect to a controller PS group.
To display this dialog box, select System→Connect.

Select the required controller PS group.

102 385575/D
Controller process stations

Controller process stations

This section contains the following topics:


Resetting controller process stations..............................................................................103
Redundant systems ........................................................................................................104

Resetting controller process stations


You can reset a selected controller process station (PS) for example in the event of a
software problem. To retrieve the default settings, all controller PSs must be reset.

Resetting the controller PS in a single-computer system


Before resetting the controller PS in a single-computer system, you must ensure that the
K-Pos DP system does not have control of the vessel’s propulsion system.
To reset the controller PS, follow the procedure described in Resetting all controller
PSs in a dual or triple redundant system.

Resetting one controller PS in a dual or triple redundant


system
Before resetting a controller PS in a dual or triple-redundant system using the Reset
Controller PS dialog box, you should ensure that another controller PS is operational and
is selected as the master computer (see Redundant systems on page 104).
To display this dialog box, select System→Reset Controller PS.
To reset a controller PS, select the Controller
PS to be reset and then click the OK or Apply
button.

385575/D 103
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Resetting all controller PSs in a dual or triple redundant


system
If the vessel is not under control by the K-Pos DP system, you can reset all K-Pos DP
controller PSs simultaneously. During DP operation the K-Pos DP controller PSs receive
the same input from sensors, position-reference systems and thrusters, and perform the
same calculations.
The best way to ensure that errors are deleted from the K-Pos DP controller PSs is
therefore to reset all of them. To retrieve the default settings, all K-Pos DP controller
PSs must be reset.
1 Ensure that the K-Pos DP system does not have control of the vessel’s propulsion
system.
2 Ensure that the K-Pos DP system is in Standby mode.
3 Ensure that no thrusters are enabled.
4 Reset all K-Pos DP controller PSs simultaneously using the Reset Controller PS
dialog box (see Resetting one controller PS in a dual or triple redundant system
on page 103).
5 Click the OK button to confirm.
• Until at least one K-Pos DP controller PS is running, a dialog box containing the
following message is displayed on all Operator Stations:
No network response from the DP Controller PS
• When at least one K-Pos DP controller PS is running, a message box is displayed
on all Operator Stations:
The DP Controller PS is now responding
The K-Pos DP system is in Standby mode with default settings.
The following message is displayed in the Event List view for each controller PS:
Equip <yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss>Alarm <DpPUx>: Station is operational
(x refers to controller PS A, B or C).
6 Select the master controller PS (see Redundant systems below).

Redundant systems
In dual redundant systems, the controller cabinet contains two controller process stations
(PSs) that operate with a master/slave relationship.
In triple redundant systems, the controller cabinet contains three controller PSs. The
concept of majority voting is used to detect and isolate faults in the sensors and in the
K-Pos DP system itself.

104 385575/D
Controller process stations

Error objects
A system surveillance function keeps track of the extent to which the controller PS and
its associated IO equipment is technically capable of fulfilling its intended purpose. The
IO drivers and different system health monitoring functions automatically register “error
objects”. Each error object is identified with a unique name and is used to report the
presence or absence of errors. By communicating with other members of the redundancy
group, the system keeps track of which errors are shared between all controller PSs in
the group (common errors), which ones are exclusive to one controller PS and which
ones that make the PS incapable of controlling the process.
No weights are assigned to errors. Neither is the number of errors significant. What
makes a PS “more capable” than another is defined by the following list in the order of
falling capability:
• OK — A PS without errors
• Common error — A PS with only common errors
• Degraded — A PS with separate errors
• Incapable — An incapable, but running PS

Dual redundant system


The PSs in a dual redundant system operate in parallel, each receiving the same input
from the operator, sensors, position-reference systems and thrusters, and each performing
the same calculations. However, only the Online (Master) PS can control the propulsion
system. You can select which PS is to be the Master, however, a switch is only possible
to a PS which is of equal or better capability than the current Master. In the event of a
deviation between the two PSs, you can update the Offline PS with data from the Master
PS. See Redundant Stations dialog box on page 107.
Both control computers are continuously checked for both hardware and software
failures. If a failure is detected, a warning or alarm is given.
Some advantages of redundancy are:
• No single-point failure
The system is designed to avoid total system failure if single failure occurs.
• Failure detection
The system will detect a failure, allowing corrective actions to be taken.
• Fault isolation
If one system component fails, the other components will not be affected.

Automatic switch-over to the Offline PS


If a failure is detected in the Master PS, a switch-over to the Offline PS is activated
automatically and an alarm message is given, e.g.:
Redundancy group "DpMain": B Master

385575/D 105
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

This automatic switching is allowed only once. Before any further auto-switching can
take place, the operator must have the fault rectified.

Triple redundant system


In triple redundant systems, each PS uses the same data from the operator, sensors,
and position-reference systems to calculate command signals to the propulsion system
(they are all Online). Fault detection and isolation are achieved by a process of
majority voting. Once the voting has taken place, the failed (incorrect) computer will,
if possible, correct itself automatically, based on the values of the other computers.
If the failed computer cannot correct itself, the operator is informed and the faulty
computer should be replaced. Meanwhile, the two other computers continue working
and perform dual-redundancy procedures in the same way as a dual system (see Dual
redundant system on page 105). The system will automatically reconfigure itself to a
triple-redundant system as soon as the failed computer is replaced.
In triple redundant systems, all three PSs perform voting, but only one of the PSs, the
Master PS, communicates with the operator stations, and outputs serial line information.
You can select the PS that is to be the Master, however, a switch-over is only possible to
a PS which is of equal or better capability than the current Master.
If the present Master PS should fail, another PS will immediately take over the Master
responsibility.
Advantages of triple redundancy are:
• Voting of sensor input signals
The voting is performed between tightly synchronised computers to:
– Detect sensor errors such as compass drift and sensor breakdown.
– Ensure that all three computers use the same data as a basis for calculation of
command signals.
• Software Implemented Fault Tolerance (SIFT)
The Triple Modular Redundancy (TMR) detects an error in the processing elements
and corrects the error by employing voting algorithms. The system represents a
Software Implemented Fault Tolerance (SIFT) concept.
• Voting on command (output) signals
– DP-31: The thruster commands from the three control computers are compared by
the “master” computer and the median command is selected to be the final output.
– DP-32: The voting of the thruster commands is performed in the thruster control
field station.
• No single-point failure (see Dual redundant system on page 105)
• Failure detection (see Dual redundant system on page 105)
• Fault isolation (see Dual redundant system on page 105)

106 385575/D
Controller process stations

Redundant Stations dialog box


To display the dialog box, select System→Redundant Stations.

Figure 18 Example for a dual system

Figure 19 Example for a triple system

385575/D 107
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

PS Groups
Select the target controller PS group for all commands and operational statuses of
the dialog box from this list.
Redundancy Status
Master
The current master PS is indicated in the appropriate check box. The master PS is
designated for specific tasks only done by a single PS on behalf of the redundancy
group.
You can click the Set button to set the corresponding PS as the master.
Online
In a dual (or degraded triple) system the current online PS is indicated in the
appropriate check box.
In a fully operational triple redundant system all three PSs are online, indicated
in the appropriate check box.
Capability
Displays the Capability status (i.e. to which extent the PS is technically capable of
fulfilling its intended purpose).
• OK
No errors
• Common Error
Errors that are common to all PSs in the controller PS group.
• Degraded
Errors that are restricted to one of the PSs in the group.
• Incapable
The PS is in a state where it should not be used as the master or online PS.
Mode
Running modes are defined to structure the start-up phase, before a PS is ready to
take control.
• Inactive
The PS is not communicating. It may be in the process of initiating or loading,
or not executing at all.
• Starting
The PS is communicating, but more preparation is needed. In particular, it may
be necessary to initiate IO devices and detect their state.
• Learning
The PS is communicating and has been initiated, but is in the process of
retrieving information from other PSs, which are in Running mode. This mode
can also be entered from Running mode in cases where normal operation has
been interrupted for a while.
• Running

108 385575/D
Controller process stations

The PS is communicating, and has finished all start-up preparations.


Redundancy Control
Redundancy type
Displays the Redundancy type for the selected controller PS group. Single, Dual
and Triple are the ones that are relevant for K-Pos purposes.
PS fault tolerance
This is the number of PSs that can fail without losing control of the system. For a
single system this number is 0, for a fully operational dual system it is 1, and for a
fully operational triple system it is 2.
Update Offline
In the event of deviation between the two PSs in a dual (or degraded triple) system,
click Update Offline to update the offline PS.
Update Offline is unavailable for a fully operational triple redundant system. If
a failure is detected in PS A, B or C, the system continues operating as a dual
redundant system and the Update Offline functionality becomes available.
If a failure is detected in PS A or B in a dual system (or in two of the three PSs in a
triple system), the Update Offline button on the dialog box becomes unavailable.
The system continues operating as a single system.
A message about the status of the last “Update Offline” is displayed below the
Update offline button, for example:
Last update offline OK
Error Objects
Error objects are used to report the presence of failures that may lead to an
auto-switch from one PS to another.
If you right-click in the Error Objects area, the following shortcut menu is
displayed:

In Error
The PS(s) on which the failure is detected.
Overruled
It can be useful to be able to overrule the automatic detection of failures, especially
in cases of instability. This is done by right-clicking the relevant error and selecting
Permanent On (the error is regarded as being permanently present) or Permanent
Off (the error is regarded as being permanently absent) on the shortcut menu.
Description
A list of the failures.
(Status field in the lower left corner)
The status field displays the current status of the selected controller PS group
(Ready, Requesting information..., Request for configuration failed, Request for

385575/D 109
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

capability failed, Request for state failed, Switching of Master failed and Error when
changing permanent settings).
Do not list error objects ...
When the check box is not selected all error object will be listed in the Description
column. Select this check box if you want to reduce the list and show only error
objects in the state of “Overruled” or “In Error”.
PS Operation...
Not relevant during normal operation.
Refresh
Clicking this button updates the content of the dialog box with the current
operational status.

110 385575/D
Sensors

Sensors

This section contains the following topics:


Gyrocompasses .............................................................................................................. 111
Wind sensors .................................................................................................................. 116
Vertical reference sensors (VRS) ...................................................................................120
Sensors dialog box — Speed page.................................................................................122
Sensors dialog box — Draught page .............................................................................125
Sensors dialog box — Rate Of Turn page .....................................................................126

Gyrocompasses
At least one gyrocompass must be enabled at all times to provide heading information to
the system for automatic control of heading.
Gyrocompasses are enabled and controlled using the Sensors dialog box - Gyro page.
You can examine the measured values from the gyrocompasses in more detail on the
Sensor view.

Sensors dialog box — Gyro page


To display the dialog box, select Sensors→Gyro, or press the GYRO button.

385575/D 111
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

OK
The OK status for each gyrocompass is shown in the matching OK check box. The
status for all channels from the gyrocompass must be OK for the check box to be
selected. This check box is for information only.
Enable
Each gyrocompass has an associated Enable check box. Selecting this check box
enables the signals from the gyrocompass. The system will automatically disable a
gyrocompass if it is not OK, i.e. clear the Enable check box, and also make the
check box unavailable.
Preference
These option buttons allows you to specify which gyrocompass is preferred for
use by the system.
In Use
The gyrocompass that is currently used by the system to calculate the vessel's
heading is indicated in the In Use check box. If the gyrocompass is not OK or a
failure is detected, the check mark is cleared from the In Use check box, and the
system will automatically switch to another gyrocompass enabled for use.
Gyro Heading
The measured heading from the gyrocompass.
Added Correction
This text box allows you to specify a gyrocompass correction to compensate
for a possible offset of the ships gyrocompass for example compared with a
surveyor's gyrocompass. The text box is unavailable and appears dimmed when
the corresponding gyrocompass is enabled.

112 385575/D
Sensors

Note
To ensure consistent data for all users of a gyrocompass, it is recommended to
adjust the gyrocompass itself.

Used Heading
The measured heading from the gyrocompass with added correction.
Note
The Gyro Deviation Calculation (see Gyro Deviation dialog box on page 115) uses
the Used Heading values as input for the calculations.

Gyro status lamp


The GYRO button has a status lamp which shows the status of the gyrocompasses:
• On — At least one gyrocompass is enabled and accepted by the system.
• Flashing — The measurements from one of the enabled gyrocompasses are not
accepted by the system.
• Off — No gyrocompasses are enabled.

Displayed heading information


You can examine the measured values from the gyrocompasses in more detail on the
Sensors view.

Rejection of heading measurements


Normally, all the available gyrocompasses will be running and enabled for use. The
system then receives and compares the signals from all the gyrocompasses, but uses only
one of them to calculate the vessel's heading. You can specify which gyrocompass is
preferred for use by the system:
• When two gyrocompasses are enabled, the system will use the preferred gyrocompass.
If the difference between the value read from a gyrocompass and the model value
exceeds a predefined limit, an alarm is displayed; for example:
Gyro 1 prediction error
If this error is for the gyrocompass that is in use, the system will change automatically
to the other gyrocompass.
Note
In the event of a Gyro prediction error, you should always check the values from
the gyrocompasses on the Sensors view and compare with an alternative source of
heading information to confirm which gyrocompass is faulty.

385575/D 113
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

• When three gyrocompasses are enabled, the system will normally use the preferred
gyrocompass. If the difference between the measurement from one of the
gyrocompasses and the median value exceeds a predefined limit, the measurements
from this gyrocompass are rejected and an alarm will be given. If necessary, the
system will change to another gyrocompass.

Faulty gyrocompasses
If measurements from a gyrocompass are not accepted by the system, a message is given
with information about the failure. The message may define the faulty gyro directly; for
example: Gyro 1 not ready. Alternatively, it may indicate only that there is a difference
between the measurements from the available gyrocompasses. In the latter case, you
must try to find the faulty compass by comparing the received measurements with an
alternative source of heading information.
In the following examples it is assumed that two gyrocompasses are available, that both
gyrocompasses are enabled and that Gyro 1 is in use:
• If there is a failure on Gyro 2 (the gyrocompass that is not in use), disable the signals
from Gyro 2 and rectify the fault.
• If a fault is detected on Gyro 1 (the gyrocompass that is in use), the system will
switch to Gyro 2 automatically if Gyro 2 is enabled. Disable the signals from Gyro
1 and rectify the fault.
• If there is a failure on a gyrocompass and the system cannot detect which compass
is faulty; for example:
Compass difference
Do the following:
1 Check the values from the gyrocompasses on the Sensors view and use an
alternative compass to find which gyrocompass is faulty.
2 Disable the faulty gyrocompass and rectify the fault.
When a faulty gyrocompass is repaired, you should enable it again.

Heading dropout
If the vessel heading that is estimated by the Vessel Model differs significantly from the
measured vessel heading, the following message is given:
Heading prediction error
If this continues for more than two seconds, the system will assume that the information
from the gyrocompasses is unreliable and will stop updating the Vessel Model with the
measured heading. In this situation the following alarm will be given:
Heading dropout
The same alarm will occur if no gyrocompasses are enabled, or if there is a total
gyrocompass malfunction.
It is not possible to operate with automatic heading or position control in a Heading
dropout situation.

114 385575/D
Sensors

Go to Standby mode to reset the estimated heading from the Vessel Model to the
measured gyrocompass heading.
Check that the gyrocompasses are ready, whether the readings are drifting or if other
error messages indicate interface errors.

Gyro Deviation dialog box


The data from each gyro can be monitored and evaluated using Gyro Deviation
Calculation. This function is based on the fact that the vessel heading can be derived
from the relative positions between two GPS antennas. The error for each gyro is
estimated from the filtered difference between the GPS derived heading and the gyro
data. Recommended minimum antenna separation is 10 m, and the accuracy of the
computed heading increases with distance between the antennas.
When sailing at high speed, the used heading may deviate from the computed heading
due to lack of speed/latitude compensation. After the vessel has stopped, the Correction
value may still be incorrect for some minutes.
Note
Before correcting for error on the gyro, you should let the Correction value stabilise.

To display the dialog box, select Sensors→Gyro Deviation.

Gyro Deviation Calculation


The Gyro Deviation Calculation uses the Used Heading values (see Sensors dialog
box - Gyro page) as input for the calculations.
Active
Select this check box to enable Gyro Deviation Calculation.

385575/D 115
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Filter Time
The default value is the recommended minimum value for your vessel. The
shorter the distance between the GPS antennas, the longer the time required for
data filtering.
Calculated Correction
Correction
For each gyro the difference between the computed heading and the used heading
from the gyro is displayed.
You can select to have the Calculated Correction value displayed as a trend plot in
the Sensors view (see Sensor view on page 303) and in the Trends view (see Trends
view on page 325) using the view control dialog boxes for these views.
Std.Dev
The Standard Deviation for each estimate is displayed. If the Correction is one
degree or more, and the Std.Dev is significantly smaller, you should correct the
error on the gyro.
Based on
This displays the GPSs the calculation is based on.

Wind sensors
At least one wind sensor should be enabled at all times to provide the system with wind
speed and direction information.
Normally, input from all the available wind sensors will be enabled. The system then
receives and compares the signals from all the sensors, but uses only one of them to
calculate the wind force acting on the vessel.

Sensors dialog box — Wind page


Wind sensors are enabled and controlled using the Sensors dialog box - Wind page.
You can specify which wind sensor is preferred for use by the system. If no errors
are detected in the wind sensor measurements, the system will always use the
operator-preferred sensor (for which Preference is selected in the Sensors dialog box
Wind page).
The raw measurements of wind speed and direction are filtered internally (using a
Kalman filter with both low and high frequency parts), to estimate the most reasonable
speed and direction values to be used by the K-Pos DP system.
To display the dialog box, select Sensors→Wind, or press the WIND button.

116 385575/D
Sensors

OK
The OK status for each wind sensor is shown in the corresponding OK check box.
The status for all channels from the wind sensor must be OK for the check box to
be selected. This check box is for information only.
Enable
Each wind sensor has an associated Enable check box. Selecting this check box
enables the signals from the wind sensor.
Preference
Use these option buttons to select the operator-preferred wind sensor to be used
by the system.
In Use
Indicates the wind sensor currently used to calculate the wind force acting on the
vessel. If no errors are detected in the Wind sensor measurements, the system will
always use the operator-preferred sensor (see Preference above).
Relative Speed
The displayed wind speed is the measured wind speed relative to the vessel, not
corrected for vessel motion.
Relative Dir.
The displayed wind direction is the measured direction relative to the vessel
heading, not corrected for vessel motion.

385575/D 117
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Manual
You can manually enter the values for wind speed and wind direction which the
system should use to calculate the wind force acting on the vessel. To enter values,
disable all sensors and click the Apply button. The In Use check box for Manual
input will be selected, the True Speed and True Dir fields will appear white, and
you may enter values using the keyboard or the Numeric Entry Keypad dialog box.
True Speed, True Dir
Display the true wind speed and direction. The present mode and whether or not
one or more sensor is enabled, determine which values are displayed in these fields:
• In Standby mode with one or more wind sensor enabled, the True Speed and
True Dir fields display the same values as Relative Speed and Relative Dir.
• In any mode other than Standby with one or more wind sensor enabled, the
True Speed and True Dir fields display the true wind speed and direction values
(filtered values).
• In any mode with no wind sensors enabled, the True Speed and True Dir fields
contain the manually-entered values for the true wind speed and direction.

Wind status lamp


The WIND button has a status lamp which shows the status of the wind sensors:
• On — At least one wind sensor is enabled and accepted by the system.
• Flashing — The measurements from one of the enabled wind sensors are not accepted
by the system or an error situation exists in at least one of the wind sensor channels if
only a single wind sensor has been enabled.
• Off — No wind sensors are enabled.

Faulty wind sensors


If measurements from a wind sensor are not accepted by the system, a message is given
with information about the failure. The message may define the faulty sensor directly;
for example:
Wind 1 not ready
Alternatively, it may indicate only that there is a difference between the measurements
from the available sensors. The difference may be due to a faulty wind sensor. In
the latter situation, you must try to find the faulty sensor by comparing the received
measurements with an alternative source of wind information.
In any case you should use an alternative source of wind information to determine which
wind sensor that provides the wind measurements that is most representative for the
wind forces acting on the vessel.
In the following examples it is assumed that two wind sensors are available, both sensors
are enabled and Wind 1 is in use:
• If there is a failure on Wind 2 (the sensor that is not in use), disable the signals from
Wind 2 and rectify the fault.

118 385575/D
Sensors

• If a fault is detected on Wind 1 (the sensor that is in use), the system will switch to
Wind 2 automatically. Disable the signals from Wind 1 and rectify the fault.
• If there is a failure on a wind sensor and the system cannot detect which sensor
is faulty; for example:
Wind speed difference
Do the following:
1 Check the values from the wind sensors on the Sensors view and use an
alternative source of wind information to find which sensor is faulty.
2 Disable the faulty sensor and rectify the fault.
When a faulty wind sensor is repaired, you should enable it again.
Note
A wind measurement will be influenced by the location of the sensor. Differences
in measurements can arise naturally. It is important to use the sensor that is most
representative for the wind forces acting on the vessel.

Rejection of faulty wind data


Faulty jumps in readings from a wind sensor would lead to an unwanted increase in
thrust setpoint. To avoid this, the system performs the following test:
• A wind speed measurement is rejected by the system if the wind speed is above
a predefined limit (for example 15 m/s) and increases by more than a predefined
value (for example 10 m/s).
• A wind direction measurement is rejected by the system if the wind speed is above a
predefined limit (for example 10 m/s) and the wind direction changes by more than a
predefined value (for example 60 degrees).
The wind sensor is rejected if more than a predefined number (for example 15) of
consecutive readings are rejected according to the limits described in the previous
paragraphs. The following alarm is given:
Wind sensor rejected <current speed/direction>
In order to adapt quickly to dynamic change in wind, the input data to the test is the
difference between new measurements, and low pass filtered speed data with a small
time constant (5 seconds).
The filter is reset on three different conditions:
• Continuously reset in Standby mode (to avoid problems entering/leaving the trainer).
• When sensor Enabled changes from OFF to ON.
• If there is a long time (5 minutes) since ready/OK from the IO system.
Note
The wind sensor(s) will be rejected if speed is increasing with more than 10 m/s in
Trainer mode (and not in Standby mode). The situation is resolved by disabling/enabling
the rejected sensor.

385575/D 119
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Operating without wind sensor input


There can be situations where you want to temporarily stop using the input from the wind
sensors, such as during helicopter operations or when operating close to another large
structure where there may be sudden disturbances of the measured wind. If you disable
all the wind sensors, the system continues to use the wind speed and direction values that
were measured just before the most recent wind sensor was disabled.

Vertical reference sensors (VRS)


At least one vertical reference sensor must be available to provide the system with roll
and pitch information. This information is used to adjust the measurements received
from the position-reference systems for the vessel's roll and pitch motions. If the VRS is
equipped with a heave sensor, the heave information is used for monitoring purposes
only.
If VRS information is lost, the system will be unable to compensate the received position
measurements for vessel motion. The positioning capability of the system can then be
severely degraded.
Vertical reference sensors are enabled and controlled using the Sensors dialog box -
VRS page.
Normally, all the available VRSs will be enabled for use. The system then receives and
compares the signals from all the VRSs, but uses only one of them. You can specify
which VRS is preferred for use by the system. If no errors are detected in the VRS
measurements, the system will always use the operator-preferred sensor (for which
Preference is selected on the Sensors dialog box - VRS page).

Sensors dialog box — VRS page


Vertical reference sensors are enabled and controlled using the Sensors dialog box -
VRS page.
To display the dialog box, select Sensors→VRS, or press the VRS button.

120 385575/D
Sensors

OK
The OK status for each VRS is shown in the corresponding OK check box. The
status for all channels from the VRS must be OK for the check box to be selected.
This check box is for information only.
Enable
Each VRS has an associated Enable check box. Selecting this check box enables
the signals from the VRS.
Preference
These option buttons allow you to specify which VRS is preferred for use by the
system.
In Use
The VRS that is currently used by the system is indicated in the In Use check box.
Pitch
The measured pitch from the VRS.
Roll
The measured roll from the VRS.
Heave
The measured heave from the VRS.

VRS status lamp


The VRS button has a status lamp which shows the status of the VRS:
• On — At least one VRS is enabled and accepted by the system.
• Flashing — The measurements from one of the enabled VRSs are not accepted by
the system or an error situation exists in at least one of the VRS channels if only a
single VRS has been enabled.
• Off — No VRSs are enabled.

385575/D 121
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Displayed VRS information


You can examine the measured values from the VRS in more detail on the Sensors views.

Faulty VRS
If measurements from a VRS are not accepted by the system, or if at least one of the
channels for a VRS is faulty, a message is given with information about the failure. The
message may define the faulty VRS directly; for example: VRS not ready. Alternatively,
it may only indicate that there is a difference between the measurements from the
available VRSs. In the latter situation, you must try to find the faulty sensor by
comparing the received measurements with an alternative source of VRS information.
In the following examples it is assumed that two VRSs are available, that both are
enabled, and that VRS 1 is in use:
• If there is a failure on VRS 2 (the VRS that is not in use), disable the signals from
VRS 2 and rectify the fault.
• If a fault is detected on VRS 1 (the VRS that is in use), the system will switch to VRS
2 automatically. Disable the signals from VRS 1 and rectify the fault.
• If there is a failure on a VRS and the system cannot detect which VRS is faulty;
for example,
VRS pitch difference
Do the following:
1 Check the values from the VRSs on the Sensors view and use alternative VRS
information to find which VRS is faulty.
2 Disable the faulty VRS and rectify the fault.
When a faulty VRS is repaired, you should enable it again.

Sensors dialog box — Speed page


Speed measurements can be used as an addition to position measurements to improve
the vessel speed control.
The speed information is received from two sources, the Doppler Log sensors and the
GPS speed sensors. You can enable available speed sensors or enter a manual alongships
vessel speed value using the Sensors dialog box - Speed page.
In high speed operations all enabled sensors will normally, unless a sensor has failed,
be used by the system. It is recommended to also enable Manual speed input since the
Manual value then will be updated based on the In Use sensors. Should all sensors be
lost, an initial Manual value reflects the real situation.
To display the dialog box, select Sensors→Speed.

122 385575/D
Sensors

Doppler Log
Enable
Select this check box to enable the Doppler Log speed sensor. You will not be able
to select this check box if the Doppler Log is not OK (the check box is dimmed).
In Use
The sensors that are currently used by the system is indicated in the In Use check
box. If a sensor fails, it will no longer be in use, and this check box is cleared.
Along
Shows the measured alongships vessel speed.
Athwart
Shows the measured athwartships vessel speed.
The Doppler Log speed is marked with SOG or STW depending on the type of
speed output:
• SOG — Speed over ground
• STW — Speed through water

385575/D 123
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

GPS Speed
Enable
Select this check box to enable the GPS speed sensor. You will not be able to select
this check box if the measured GPS speed is not OK (the check box is dimmed).
In Use
The sensor that is currently used by the system is indicated in the In Use check box.
If a sensor fails, it will no longer be in use, and this check box is cleared.
Speed
Shows the measured vessel speed.
Course
Shows the measured vessel course.
Note
When a failure occurs in the GPS speed and/or course signals, the Speed and
Course boxes are shown empty.

Manual Speed
Enable
Select this check box to enable Manual speed. In high speed operations it is
recommended to enable Manual when using speed sensors to have an initial
Manual value that reflects the real situation.
In Use
If the manual value is currently used by the system, it is indicated in the In Use
check box. This check box is for information only.
Along
When no speed sensors are enabled, you can enter a value in this field. This field is
not available when one or more sensors are enabled.
If you try to enter a value that is too high, a message informing you about the legal
range is displayed. You will have to change the input value to continue.
Used Speed
Shows the vessel speed used by the system. This is an average, filtered value of the
combined measurements from the In Use speed sensors or manual input.
Along
Shows the used alongships vessel speed.
Athwart
Shows the used athwartships vessel speed. This will be zero when no speed
sensors are enabled.

124 385575/D
Sensors

Sensors dialog box — Draught page


For optimum positioning performance, the system must have accurate information
regarding the vessel's draught at all times. The vessel draught can either be specified by
the operator or measured by a draught sensor.
The source of draught information is selected and controlled using the Sensors dialog
box - Draught page.
If the information from the draught sensors is correct and reliable, then this should be
used in preference to manually-entered or fixed values.
To display the dialog box, select Sensors→Draught.

The content of this dialog box will vary according to system configuration. The dialog
box in the system installed on your vessel may display only some of the items shown in
this example.
Sensor
When Sensor is selected, you can specify the draught sensor that is to be used.
Each draught sensor has an associated Enable check box. Selecting this check box
enables the signals from this draught sensor for use by the system. If more than
one sensor is enabled, the system uses the average of all the enabled sensors. The
sensor currently used by the system is indicated in the In Use check box. If Sensor
is selected but no sensors are enabled, the Manual value is used by the system.
Operational
When Operational is selected, the predefined operational draught value is used
by the system.

385575/D 125
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Transit
When Transit is selected, the predefined transit draught value is used by the system.
Manual
When Manual is selected, the draught value entered under Fixed Draught is used
by the system. If you try to enter a value that is too high or too low, the value is
rejected by the system and a message informing you about the legal range for
draught is displayed.
Used Draught
Shows the draught value that is currently used by the system. This field is for
information only.

Sensors dialog box — Rate Of Turn page


Rate Of Turn (ROT) measurements can be used to improve the heading control of the
vessel. This is useful when a very accurate heading control is required during high-speed
sailing, or when a vessel has a hull shape that makes it difficult to control the heading.
Measurements of the vessel's Rate Of Turn are received from the gyrocompasses, or a
dedicated ROT sensor. The ROT sensors should be enabled to allow this information to
be used by the K-Pos DP system.
ROT sensors are enabled and controlled using the Sensors dialog box - Rate Of Turn page.
To display the dialog box, select Sensors→Rate Of Turn.

OK
The OK status for each sensor is shown in the matching OK check box. This
check box is for information only.

126 385575/D
Sensors

Enable
Each sensor has an associated Enable check box. You enable the sensor by
selecting this box. The system will automatically disable a sensor that is not OK.
The Enable check box will be cleared and will appear dimmed.
In Use
The sensor that is currently used by the system is indicated in the In Use check box.
If no errors are detected in the ROT sensor measurements, the system will use all
the OK and enabled sensors.
Rate Of Turn
Shows the measured Rate Of Turn.

385575/D 127
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Position information

This section contains the following topics:


Handling position information.......................................................................................128
Position Presentation dialog box....................................................................................129
Datum Details dialog box ..............................................................................................132
Local N/E Properties dialog box....................................................................................133
UTM Properties dialog box ...........................................................................................134
Methods for enabling position-reference systems .........................................................135
Panel buttons..................................................................................................................136
Reference System Settings dialog box...........................................................................136
Reference System dialog box.........................................................................................139
Reference System Properties dialog box .......................................................................142
Coordinate systems ........................................................................................................145
Tests on position measurements.....................................................................................147
Procedures for enabling position-reference systems......................................................152
Changing the reference origin........................................................................................154
Position dropout .............................................................................................................154

Handling position information


Two dialog boxes are used to set up the required conditions for handling and conversion
of position information from the position-reference systems and to and from the display
(see Figure 20):
• The Position Presentation dialog box can be used to select the datum and coordinate
system for display of position information. See Position Presentation dialog box
on page 129.
• The Reference System Properties dialog box can be used to provide information about
the input position data from each reference system. See Reference System Properties
dialog box on page 142. The following characteristics can be specified:
– Input datum.
– Offset of antenna or sensor head from the vessel's Midships position.
– Update period and accuracy.
Certain position-reference systems provide a UTM position without the required format
information which must then be entered by the operator.

128 385575/D
Position information

Figure 20 Dialog boxes for handling position information

Position Presentation dialog box


The Position Presentation dialog box allows you to select the display format for positions.
The most appropriate display presentation for position information depends on the
operational situation. For example, if you are using only a local position-reference
system such as HPR, then you will normally use a Local N/E presentation.
If UTM, Geographic or US State Plane presentation is selected for position coordinates, a
presentation datum for the displayed positions must be selected because a global position
must be related to a specific datum if it is to be unambiguous.
Position-presentation in global coordinates may be inaccurate when a local
position-reference system is providing the reference origin.
To display this dialog box, select View→(Presentation) Position.

385575/D 129
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

This dialog box changes appearance according to the selected Co-ordinate system.
Datum
The available datums can be selected from the drop-down list.
If Local-datum is selected, the Details button must be clicked to define all the
required transformation parameters.
Details
Click this button to call up a dialog box which deals with definition of datum
transformation parameters. See Datum Details dialog box on page 132.
Co-ordinate system
Select the coordinate system to be used for displaying position information.
Local N/E

Displays positions in a local north/east coordinate system. The positions are


presented as North/East coordinates relative to the local origin point. If you
select this option you can (if configured) select between a system selected or
operator-specified position of origin (see Local N/E Properties dialog box on
page 133).

130 385575/D
Position information

The length unit to be used is specified by the Length Unit option.


UTM

Displays positions in the Universal Transverse Mercator projection. Positions are


represented by north and east distance and UTM Zone (with compensation for
false northing and false easting if appropriate; see UTM Properties dialog box on
page 134). If you select this option, you must also select the datum that is to be
used for the conversion from the internal coordinate system to these coordinates.
The length unit to be used is specified by the Length Unit option.
Geographic

Displays positions in a global geographic coordinate system. Positions are


presented as latitude and longitude in the format specified by the Format option.
If you select this option, you must also select the datum that is to be used for the
conversion from the internal coordinate representation to these coordinates.

385575/D 131
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

US State Plane

Displays positions in the US State Plane coordinate system. Positions are


represented by north and east distance to the origin of the State Plane Zone. If
you select this option you must also select the datum that is to be used for the
conversion from the internal coordinate system to these coordinates.
If US State Plane is selected, the State Plane Zone drop-down list allows you to
select the relevant state plane zone to be used.

SPCS 27 and SPCS 83 are defined for NAD 27 and NAD 83 respectively. The
proper datum should therefore also be set, i.e. select NAD 27 as datum when using
SPCS 27 and select NAD 83 when using SPCS 83.
Length Unit
The length unit to be used is specified by the Length Unit option.
The Length Unit part of the dialog box changes according to the coordinate system
selected. For Local N/E, UTM and US State Plane presentations, the system allows
you to select the length unit to be used. For Geographic presentation, the system
allows you to select the display format for latitude and longitude.

Datum Details dialog box


A datum describes the earth as an ellipsoid using two parameters: Semimajor Axis and
Flattening.
The Datum Details dialog box contains the Semimajor Axis and Flattening values and
datum transformation parameters for conversion from WGS84 to the selected datum.
To display the dialog box, select Details button on the Position Presentation dialog box.

132 385575/D
Position information

For Local-datum all fields are editable, and you must define all the required
transformation parameters (see also Reference System Properties dialog box on
page 142).
Translation
The required translation from WGS84 to the selected datum.
Rotation
The required rotation from WGS84 to the selected datum.
Scale
The required scaling from WGS84 to the selected datum.
Semimajor Axis
The semi major axis of the earth ellipsoid for the selected datum.
Flattening
The inverse flattening of the earth ellipsoid for the selected datum.

Local N/E Properties dialog box


The Co-ordinate system - Local N/E option button on the Position Presentation dialog
box must be selected.
To display the dialog box, click the Local N/E Properties button.

385575/D 133
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Use Reference System Origin


Allows you to select between a system selected or operator-specified position
of origin.
When this check box is selected, the position data of the reference origin is
subtracted from the position information received by the system.
An operator-specified position of origin cannot differ from the actual position by
more than 20000m. If you try to enter a position of origin that is too far from the
actual position, a message box is displayed informing you about the error.
Datum and Position of Origin are unavailable when the check box is selected.
Leave the check box cleared if you want to use an operator-specified position
of origin.
Datum
Select the required datum for position of origin (on this dialog box only).
Position of Origin
Enter coordinates of the position of origin.
Select the format of the position of origin (in this dialog box only), Geographic,
UTM or US State Plane.

UTM Properties dialog box


The Co-ordinate system - UTM option button on the Position Presentation dialog box
must be selected.
To display the dialog box, select the UTM Properties button.

134 385575/D
Position information

False Easting
When UTM presentation is selected, to avoid the presentation of negative
coordinates, you can specify that a fixed offset of 500 000 m is to be added to the
east/west component of a UTM position before it is displayed.
False Northing
When UTM presentation is selected, you can specify that a fixed offset of 10 000
000 m is to be added to the north/south component of a UTM position before it
is displayed (10 000 000 m is the approximate distance from the Equator to the
North Pole in a UTM grid). This avoids the display of negative coordinates for
positions in the southern hemisphere. False Northing is normally only applicable
on the southern hemisphere.
Zone options
Automatic zone calculation
Select this box to have the UTM zone calculated automatically from the geodetic
position measurements.
Zone
The required system UTM zone (not available if the UTM zone is calculated
automatically).
Zone offset
Allows you to apply a fixed offset to the received longitude degrees when
calculating the UTM zone of a position. You can offset the system UTM zone
up to ±3°.

Methods for enabling position-reference


systems
The K-Pos DP system provides the following methods for enabling and disabling
position-reference systems:

385575/D 135
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

• Panel buttons
• One of the following, depending on system configuration:
– Reference System Settings dialog box
– Reference System dialog box
For information about all the options available from these dialog boxes, see Reference
System Settings dialog box on page 136 and Reference System dialog box on page 139.

Panel buttons
The SENSORS button group contains buttons which enable or disable each of the
available position-reference systems. Each button has a status lamp which shows the
status of the reference system:
• Off — disabled
• Flashing — enabled and calibrating, enabled and calibrated but rejected by the DP, or
not providing data
• On — enabled and accepted (acceptable position measurements are being received)

Reference System Settings dialog box


To display the dialog box, select Sensors→(Reference Systems) Settings.

136 385575/D
Position information

Position Properties
Select the required Datum for position presentation to be used on this dialog box.
Select the format of the position of origin, either Geographic, UTM or US State
Plane.
Weight
You can change the position-reference system’s relative weight.
Normal
Provides standard relative weight between the enabled position-reference systems,
i.e. all systems with equal estimated variance have equal weights.
Reduced GPS
Reduces the influence from the measured GPS positions relative to measurements
from other position-reference systems.
Reduced GPS weight is especially important if you have an oscillating GPS system,
as often will be the case in equatorial waters due to ionospheric degradation of
GPS. In this way a position-reference system with slow update rate, such as an
LBL system, will have greater influence on the model than a GPS system with
faster update rate.
Example showing typical relative weights when using 2 GPSs and 1 LBL with
similar accuracy levels:
GPS-1 GPS-2 HPR
Normal 0.33 0.33 0.33
Reduced GPS 0.10 0.10 0.80
The relative weights used are shown on the Reference system main view.
Acceptance Limits
The acceptance limit for the Prediction Test and indirectly also the Median Test
can be changed.
Narrow
Narrow limit. Corresponds to a Minimum Prediction Error circle with a small
radius. The radius may still increase due to increased noise in the position-reference
system. Narrow is recommended when operating in calm weather and with
requirements for accurate station-keeping. If all available (or the dominating)
position reference exhibit an erroneous drift in position, the system(s) will also
be rejected at an early stage before the vessel is significantly affected by the
wrong measurements.
Normal
Medium limit. The same Minimum Prediction Error limit as for Narrow is used.
There is an additional feedback mechanism where the actual deviation from the
model is used to increase the Prediction Error limit up to a maximum of 2 to 3
times the smallest radius. Normal should be applied in situations where there is
a chance that the DP model does not follow the actual movement of the vessel.
This is especially relevant when operating in rough sea. It is also applicable for
a vessel operating with another vessel alongside. A negative side-effect of this

385575/D 137
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

setting is that the system will, to a larger extent than with the Narrow setting, tend
to follow drifting position-reference systems.
Wide
Wide limit. A Minimum Prediction Error circle with an increased radius compared
to the other two settings is used. The same feedback mechanism as for Normal is
used, and the maximum value of the Prediction Error is also increased. Wide is
suitable, for example, for sailing in Mixed/Joystick mode at high speed.
Median Test
The settings of the Median Test (see Median test on page 150) can be changed.
Off
Turns off the median testing. This is indicated with the text OFF in the Median Test
field on the Refsys view, and by removal of the median test limit circle from the
plot on the Refsys view.
Warning
Turns on the median testing. When selected, a deviation warning is given if the
difference between the position data from a specific position-reference system and
the median of all online reference systems exceeds a preset warning limit.
Warning can be preferable compared to Warning and Reject (below) in some
instances. For example, when operating with two GPSs and one or two HPR
systems, and the GPSs have similar failures, Warning and Reject could lead to
rejection of the HPR by the median test.
Warning and Reject
Turns on the median testing. When selected, a reject warning is given if the
difference between the position data from a specific position-reference system and
the median of all online reference systems exceeds a preset combined warning and
reject limit. The position-reference system is rejected.
The median test limit circle is shown on the plot on the Refsys view, together with
the limit value in the Median Test field.
Set System Mode and Origin
Reset
Click this button to reset the System Origin and to deselect all position sources of
the corresponding position-reference system.
ID
Select the position sources to use for the required position-reference systems from
the drop-down lists.
System Mode
The Accepted check boxes show which position-reference systems and/or
individual position sources are currently enabled and accepted. The Monitor,
Enable and Disable option buttons are used for selecting position-reference systems
and individual position sources to monitor, enable and disable, respectively.

138 385575/D
Position information

A reference system enabled for monitoring will not influence the DP model (zero
weight), and it will not be included as an active reference system for the median
test. Apart from this all other reference system checking is active.
System Origin
The operator may choose to fix the reference origin of one or more reference
systems. A reference system with a fixed reference origin will not be calibrated
towards the model. Fixed reference origins can be specified by typing the
coordinates and selecting Fix. This is useful when the reference origin is known,
for example the position of an HPR or LBL transponder relative to a BOP or an
Artemis Fix antenna.
Mobile
Position sources can be specified to be mobile by selecting the corresponding
check boxes. This is important for operations such as following a mobile target.

Reference System dialog box


The Reference System dialog box has the following three tabbed pages:
• Enable — used for selecting position-reference systems to enable and monitor
• Weight — used for changing the position-reference systems' relative weight
• Validation — used for selecting the acceptance limits for the Prediction test and
switching the Median test on/off
To display the dialog box, select Sensors→(Reference Systems) Reference System.

Enable page

385575/D 139
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Accepted
The check boxes show which position-reference systems are currently accepted.
Monitor
Check boxes for selecting position-reference systems to monitor.
A reference system enabled for monitoring will not influence the DP model (zero
weight), and it will not be included as an active reference system for the median
test. Apart from this all other reference system checking is active.
Enable
Check boxes to enable (checked) or disable (unchecked) each of the available
position-reference systems.
The Monitor and Enable check boxes for each position-reference system are mutually
exclusive. If the Monitor check box of an enabled position-reference system is selected,
this position-reference system is disabled. If the Enable check box of a monitored
position-reference system is selected, Monitor is deselected for this position-reference
system.

Weight page

Normal
Provides standard relative weight between the enabled position-reference systems,
i.e. all systems with equal estimated variance have equal weights.
Reduced GPS Weight
Reduces the influence from the measured GPS positions relative to measurements
from other position-reference systems.

140 385575/D
Position information

Reduced GPS weight is especially important if you have an oscillating GPS system,
as often will be the case in equatorial waters due to ionospheric degradation of
GPS. In this way a position-reference system with slow update rate, such as an
LBL system, will have greater influence on the model than a GPS system with
faster update rate.
Example showing typical relative weights when using 2 GPSs and 1 LBL with
similar accuracy levels:
GPS-1 GPS-2 HPR
Normal 0.33 0.33 0.33
Reduced GPS 0.10 0.10 0.80
The relative weights used are shown on the Reference system main view.

Validation page

Acceptance Limits
The acceptance limit for the Prediction Test (see Prediction test on page 149) and
indirectly also the Median Test can be changed.
Narrow
Narrow limit. Corresponds to a Minimum Prediction Error circle with a small
radius. The radius may still increase due to increased noise in the position-reference
system. Narrow is recommended when operating in calm weather and with
requirements for accurate station-keeping. If all available (or the dominating)
position reference exhibit an erroneous drift in position, the system(s) will also
be rejected at an early stage before the vessel is significantly affected by the
wrong measurements.

385575/D 141
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Normal
Medium limit. The same Minimum Prediction Error limit as for Narrow is used.
There is an additional feedback mechanism where the actual deviation from the
model is used to increase the Prediction Error limit up to a maximum of 2 to 3
times the smallest radius. Normal should be applied in situations where there is
a chance that the DP model does not follow the actual movement of the vessel.
This is especially relevant when operating in rough sea. It is also applicable for
a vessel operating with another vessel alongside. A negative side-effect of this
setting is that the system will, to a larger extent than with the Narrow setting, tend
to follow drifting position-reference systems.
Wide
Wide limit. A Minimum Prediction Error circle with an increased radius compared
to the other two settings is used. The same feedback mechanism as for Normal is
used, and the maximum value of the Prediction Error is also increased. Wide is
suitable, for example, for sailing in Mixed/Joystick mode at high speed.
Median Test
The settings of the Median Test (see Median test on page 150) can be changed.
Off
Turns off the median testing. This is indicated with the text OFF in the Median Test
field on the Refsys view, and by removal of the median test limit circle from the
plot on the Refsys view.
Warning
Turns on the median testing. When selected, a deviation warning is given if the
difference between the position data from a specific position-reference system and
the median of all online reference systems exceeds a preset warning limit.
Warning can be preferable compared to Warning and Reject (below) in some
instances. For example, when operating with two GPSs and one or two HPR
systems, and the GPSs have similar failures, Warning and Reject could lead to
rejection of the HPR by the median test.
Warning and Reject
Turns on the median testing. When selected, a reject warning is given if the
difference between the position data from a specific position-reference system and
the median of all online reference systems exceeds a preset combined warning and
reject limit. The position-reference system is rejected.
The median test limit circle is shown on the plot on the Refsys view, together with
the limit value in the Median Test field.

Reference System Properties dialog box


The Reference System Properties dialog box allows you to change the characteristics,
update period and accuracy of a position-reference system.

142 385575/D
Position information

However, the characteristics of the position-reference system can only be defined when
it is not enabled for use or monitoring, whereas the update period and accuracy can
be specified while in operation.
The Reference System Properties dialog box can be used to define the input conversion
that is required for each position-reference system:
• For global reference systems, you must specify the datum that is used by that system
so that the position information can be converted to the selected system datum.
• For all reference systems, you can specify the offset from the antenna or sensor head
on the vessel to the vessel's Midships position, so that the position information can be
adjusted for this offset.
To display the dialog box, select Sensors→(Reference Systems) Properties.

Reference system
Select the name of the reference system from the list box. If you have changed the
properties of a reference system, and then selected another system from the list, a
dialog box is displayed prompting you want to save the changes.
Datum
For a global reference system, the datum in which the position measurements are
received. If this datum is different from the selected system datum (WGS84),
conversion to the system datum will be performed.
If position information from a global reference system is based on a predefined
datum other than those present in the Datum drop-down list, you can select
Local-datum from this drop-down list. You must then use the Position Presentation
dialog box and Datum Details dialog box (see Position Presentation dialog box
on page 129 and Datum Details dialog box on page 132, respectively) to define
the required transformation parameters.
CG Offset
Allows you to specify the offset (Ahead, STBD and Down) from the antenna or
sensor head on the vessel to the vessel's centre of gravity (Midships). The received
position information is then adjusted for this offset.
Note
Some position-reference systems have internal adjustments to CG. For these systems, the
received position information should not be adjusted by the K-Pos DP system.

385575/D 143
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Expected values
Allows you to specify an Update Period and an Accuracy for the selected
position-reference system. The Update Period is mostly used for HPR systems. To
avoid unnecessary timeout warnings, you can extend the Update Period and thus
the time before a warning is issued. The Accuracy value is used for calibration
purposes and when testing the accuracy of the position-reference system. If
calibration fails, increase the value to ease calibration of a position-reference
system. Note that the higher the value entered in the Accuracy text box, the wider
the limits for the tests on position-reference systems.
Error ellipse
The system calculates a variance of the measurements for each position-reference
system. Based on these calculations, the system places different weighting on
their measurements according to each system’s individual quality and gives
more emphasis on the position-reference systems that are providing the best
measurements. The higher the system’s variance, the lower its weighting factor.
In addition, an error ellipse may be used while calculating the accuracy of the
measurements — check box selected.
For some reference systems this error ellipse can be too large and pessimistic,
resulting in lower weighting of the reference system than necessary. De-select
the check box to switch off the function for including the error ellipse in the
calculations.
To change the selection of the function, the reference system should be de-selected
(the respective button on the panel unlit).
Depending on the type of position-reference system and its internal settings, this
function can be permanently set to on or off and not available for the operator to
select it.
Details
Clicking this button opens an extension of the Reference System Properties dialog
box (see Position Presentation dialog box on page 129). This expansion allows
you to set up a quality filter, defined as a general satellite navigation system filter
for both GPS, GLONASS and GNSS reference systems.
The Details button is only present in the Reference System Properties dialog box
when one of the above satellite navigation reference systems has been selected in
the list box.

Quality Filter Actions


With a satellite navigation system selected, and the Details button in the Reference system
Properties dialog box clicked to show the quality filter, a number of filter parameters can
be specified specifically for the selected system. For each filter parameter, a Quality Filter
Action, which can be either None, Warning (data used, warning given) or Alarm (data
rejected, alarm given), can be specified.

144 385575/D
Position information

No differential correction
Allows you to select a filter action if no differential data is available/received. This
is considered to be an important parameter, and a warning or an alarm must always
be given. It is therefore not possible to select None as an action.
MIN number of satellites (≥3)
Allows you to type the minimum number of satellites in the corresponding text
box and to select filter action. The number of satellites you enter must be larger
than or equal to the preconfigured number displayed on the dialog box (3 in the
example shown).
MAX HDOP (1.0-10.0)
Allows you to type a maximum value for the HDOP (Horizontal Dilution Of
Precision) in the text box and to select filter action. The HDOP represents the
quality of the derived position and clock bias estimates. This number is based
on the geometry of the satellite constellation. The more spread out the satellite
positions are, the lower the HDOP becomes. Low number results in less errors in
position and clock bias.
Time freeze detection
Allows you to select a filter action for the UTC (Universal Time Coordinated, i.e.
common standard time) freeze detect function. This quality filter function only
applies when receiving telegrams containing clock data.

Coordinate systems
Global and local position-reference systems
Position information from position-reference systems may be received by the K-Pos DP
system in many different forms:
• Global position-reference systems such as GPS provide position information as
Latitude and Longitude in a geodetic coordinate system. The applicable datum must
be known (for example: WGS84, ED87).

385575/D 145
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

• Some global position-reference systems provide positions in the UTM projection (a


flat surface projection, defined by a UTM zone and north and east distances from the
0-point of this zone - see UTM Properties dialog box on page 134). The applicable
datum must be known (for example: WGS84, ED87).
• Local position-reference systems such as HPR provide positions in local Cartesian
coordinates (defined by two-dimensional measurement of the north/south (X) and
east/west (Y) distances from a locally defined reference origin, such as the position
of a transponder).
Whatever types of position-reference systems are enabled, all position input is converted
into a geographic system using WGS84 as a “system datum”.

System datum
The controller always uses an internal geographic coordinate system, with a specified
system datum, WGS84.
• All position information from global reference systems which use a different datum
are converted internally to WGS 84. (To select the datum to be used for display of
position information, see Position Presentation dialog box on page 129.)
• Position information in UTM format is converted to geographic coordinates.

The reference origin


Each position-reference system provides position measurements relative to a known
reference point specific for that reference system.
The reference point of the first position-reference system selected and accepted for use
with the system, becomes the reference origin (the origin in the internal coordinate
system). Position information from any other reference systems is then calibrated
according to this coordinate system.
This coordinate system remains as the reference origin until all position-reference
systems are de-selected and a new position-reference system is selected as the reference
origin.
Selecting a particular position-reference system as the reference origin does not mean
that the K-Pos DP system treats it as being better or more reliable than any other
position-reference system. It concerns only the location of the reference origin.
The reference origin selected should be the one most appropriate to your operational
requirements.
The position of the reference origin is indicated on the Posplot view (if within the range
of the view). The reference system defining the reference origin is marked with an
asterisk on the Reference system main view.

146 385575/D
Position information

Note
Recalibrating the origin reference system will give new coordinates for the reference
origin system (can vary from zero) unless the reference system/transponder is set to be
fixed (see System Origin in Reference System Settings dialog box on page 136).

Tests on position measurements


The K-Pos DP system performs a series of tests on each position-reference system to
check that their position measurements are accurate enough for use. The following
online tests are performed:
• A Freeze test rejects repeated measurements. If the variation in the measured position
is less than a system set limit over a given period of time, the position-reference
system is rejected.
• A Variance test monitors the measurement variance and compares the variance value
with a calculated limit.
• A Prediction test detects sudden jumps or large systematic deviations in the measured
position. The limit for the prediction test is a function of the estimated position in
the Vessel Model and the actual measurement accuracy.
• A Divergence test gives a warning of systematic deviations and/or slow-drift (before
the system is rejected by the prediction test).
• A Median test detects position measurements that differ from the median position
value with more than a predefined limit. The test is mainly designed to detect slowly
drifting position-reference systems.
If the results of the prediction, median and variance tests suggest that the position
measurements from a particular reference system are not accurate, then that system's
measurements are not used.
The characteristics of the active position-reference systems are shown on the Reference
system main view (see Reference system main view on page 292).

Standard deviation of position measurements


For all position-reference systems, circles are placed around a representative sample
of position measurements. The size of the circles relates to the spread, in metres,
of the samples of position measurements. The radii of the circles correspond to the
standard deviation of the measurements of each position-reference system. The standard
deviations are also trended on the Reference system main view (see Reference system
main view on page 292).

385575/D 147
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Freeze test
If a position-reference system has an internal error causing the same measurements to be
continuously sent to the Vessel Model, the system could, if no precautions were taken,
mistake the data for good and stable measurements.
The freeze test rejects repeated measurements. The K-Pos DP system treats repeated
reports of the same position from one position-reference system with caution. The
position-reference system is monitored and its input rejected if the variation in its
position measurements is less than a predefined limit over a given time period. The
following alarm message is displayed in the Event List view:
Reference position frozen
You should disable the frozen position-reference system.
Note
By configuration, the freeze test is disabled for some position-reference systems (usually
GPS/Artemis) due to the resolution in the data from these position-reference systems.

Variance test
The K-Pos DP system calculates a variance for each of the position-reference systems
in use.
The system assigns different weightings to each position-reference system, based on
its calculated variance. In this way, the system is able to place more emphasis on the
position-reference systems that are providing the best measurements. The higher the
system's variance, the lower its weighting factor.
The following Warning Message is displayed in the Event List view if the variance of
a position-reference system exceeds a system-set limit:
Reference high noise
The position-reference system is not rejected in this event, but the K-Pos DP system
places little emphasis on the position-reference system in question.
The variance test detects if the variance in the measured values exceeds the reject limit.
The variance reject limit is based on the expected variance of the position-reference
system. The following Warning Message is displayed in the Event List view when a
position-reference system is rejected due to too high variance:
Reference high variance
You should disable the position-reference system if the event of high variance is
recurring. No corrective actions are necessary if the problem is intermittent only.

148 385575/D
Position information

Prediction test
The prediction test detects sudden jumps in the measured position, and immediately
rejects those that lie outside the limits, see Figure 21 on page 149. The test will
also reject data that drift away from the Vessel Model's predictions. The limit for the
Prediction test is a function of the actual measurement accuracy (calculated variance).

Figure 21 Prediction test


POSITION N/E

Rejected measurement

Rejection limit

Model prediction

Measurement

Rejection limit

TIME
(CD3293)

If the Prediction test limits are exceeded, the following warning message is displayed
in the Event List view:
Reference Prediction Error
When this warning message is displayed, you should verify that the correct
position-reference system is rejected. You can then disable the position-reference system
that causes the prediction error.
The prediction error limit of the most accurate position-reference system at any time,
called the Minimum Prediction Error Limit, is displayed on the Reference system main
view.
Irrespective of the accuracy of a position-reference system, the prediction error limit is
usually not set to less than 4m. This is done to avoid rejecting accurate position-reference
systems.

Divergence test
When two or more position-reference systems are in use, this slow drift test detects when
measurements from one position-reference system differ from the other(s). The limit is
taken as 70% of the prediction error limit.
The purpose of the test is to give an early indication of systematic errors before the
position-reference system is rejected by the prediction test. This test only warns the
operator, and does not automatically reject data. The following warning message is
displayed in the Event List view:

385575/D 149
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Reference high offset


When this warning message is displayed, you should examine which position-reference
system is drifting using the Reference system main view (see Reference system main
view on page 292). Recalibrate or disable the position-reference system that causes
the high offset warning.

Median test
The median test can be performed when three or more position-reference systems
are in use. The median position is computed from the filtered measurements that are
independent of the Vessel Model.
The Median test is primarily intended to reject slowly drifting position-reference systems.
Unlike the prediction test, the median test is independent of the DP model. This implies
that a position-reference system can be rejected even though its measurements do not
deviate from the Vessel Model, as can be the case with slowly drifting position-reference
systems.

Figure 22 Median test


POSITION Measurement
NORTH from system A

Reject limit
around total
median line
North
Median
line

Measurement
from system B
Measurement
from system C

POSITION
(CD2971) EAST

When the Median test is active, a blue circle with radius equal to the Median Test Limit
and with centre at the median value of all positions given by the position-reference
systems, is displayed on the Reference system main view. The Median Test Limit is
taken as 80 % of the Minimum Prediction Error Limit.
The operator may choose to reject an inaccurate position-reference system, or only to
have a warning displayed.
The following warning message is displayed in the Event List view when a
position-reference system is rejected:
Reference median rejected

150 385575/D
Position information

When this warning message is displayed, you should verify that the correct
position-reference system is rejected. The position-reference system that is verified to
be in error must be disabled. If the reference system is not disabled, this may lead to
rejection of a potentially more accurate reference system by the Prediction test.
If measurements from more than one position-reference system are outside the Median
Test Limit, only the system with the longest distance to the Median position is rejected.
This system will take part in the Median testing in the next sample (unless it is disabled
by the operator).
In a situation with several drifting position-reference systems, disabling of a reference
system may lead to a sudden change in the Median position, as illustrated in Figure 23.

Figure 23 Disabling a drifting position-reference system causes the Median position


to change

Position reference systems A and C are outside the median test limits. C is rejected.

385575/D 151
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

C has been disabled by the operator and therefore does not take part in the test. This
causes Median position to change. Position-reference system A is now outside the
median test limit. A is rejected.

Procedures for enabling position-reference


systems
The reference point of the first position-reference system selected and accepted for use
with the system, becomes the reference origin. Position information from any other
reference systems is then calibrated according to this system.

Enabling the first position-reference system


Before enabling the first position-reference system, ensure that the vessel speed is as
low as possible.
If the system has been in Joystick mode for more than a few minutes without an enabled
position-reference system, first go to Standby mode and then back to Joystick mode to
reset the Vessel Model.
1 Ensure that the required gyrocompasses are enabled.
2 Ensure that the required position-reference system is active and available.
3 Enable the position-reference system.
• An initial calibration of the position-reference system is performed.

152 385575/D
Position information

• The status lamp for the selected position-reference system will flash during the
calibration process.
4 Check that the status lamp of the selected position-reference system button becomes
steadily lit to indicate that acceptable position measurements are being received.
5 Check that the following information message is displayed in the Event List view:
Reference origin <system><vessel pos. north><vessel pos. east>
• The origin of this position-reference system is now used as the reference origin.
6 Allow the Vessel Model to stabilise before enabling any additional position-reference
systems.

Enabling other position-reference systems


The other position-reference systems that are enabled can be in a monitoring state. This
is indicated on the Reference system main view, here you will see the status for these
systems as Mon Online in the Reference system main view. To change the status from
monitoring to enabled for other reference systems:
1 Enable the other position-reference systems by clicking on the Enable check-box in
the Reference system dialog box, for the system you want to use.
• The position measurements from the selected position-reference systems are
calibrated against the reference origin.
• The button status lamps for the selected position-reference systems will flash
during the calibration process (up to 20 seconds).
2 Check that the status lamps of the selected position-reference systems become
steadily lit, or that the status shows Online in the Reference system main view,
indicating that acceptable position measurements are being received and that the
calibration process was successful. The following information message should be
displayed in the Event List view for each system:
Calibration OK <system><vessel pos. north><vessel pos. east>
3 If the variation in the position measurements from a selected position-reference
system is too high during the calibration process, the status lamp will continue
flashing and the following Warning Message will be displayed in the Event List
view:
Calibration error <system><limit><variance
• This may be due to an error in the position-reference system or higher noise than
the value specified as expected Accuracy on the Reference System Properties
dialog box. See Reference System Properties dialog box on page 142 for how
to change the value. The system will continue trying to calibrate the system
until it is disabled.
Continuous measurements of the vessel's position are essential for dynamic positioning.
Several different position-reference systems are normally used.

385575/D 153
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Changing the reference origin


Each position-reference system provides position measurements relative to a known
reference point specific for that reference system.
The reference point of the first position-reference system selected and accepted for use
with the system, becomes the reference origin (the origin in the internal coordinate
system). Position information from any other reference systems is then calibrated
according to this coordinate system.
The reference origin selected should be the one most appropriate to your operational
requirements.
To change the reference origin:
1 Disable all position-reference systems.
• If SURGE and/or SWAY is enabled the following alarm message is displayed:
No reference system enabled
• On the Reference system main view, note that the status changes to Offline with a
red circle for all disabled position-reference systems.
2 Enable the position-reference system that is to provide the reference origin.
3 Allow the Vessel Model to stabilise.
4 Enable additional position-reference systems if required.

Position dropout
If the vessel position is under automatic control and all position-reference input is lost or
rejected, the following alarm message is displayed:
All reference systems rejected
After 20 seconds without reference input, the following alarm is given:
Position dropout
This means that the system is currently using only the estimated position from the Vessel
Model, and that this position has not been updated with measured positions for at least
20 seconds (“dead reckoning” mode).
When this message is generated, the setpoint is set automatically to the current estimated
vessel position.
The status lamps of all previously enabled position-reference systems will be flashing
as the system tries to recalibrate.
You can remain in Position dropout, but the following points must be noted:
• The displayed vessel position is the estimated position from the Vessel Model. After
a few minutes, the vessel may begin to pick up speed in one direction, without this
being reflected on the display.

154 385575/D
Position information

• A calibration of the lost position-reference systems may occur at any time. This will
normally have no immediate effect on the vessel's movement, but if the calibrated
system is unreliable or drifting, the vessel may begin to move. In this event, you must
examine the Posplot view for any jumps in the displayed vessel position.
The recommended action in Position dropout (if operational circumstances allow) is:
1 Return the system to joystick control in all axes and use the joystick to manoeuvre
the vessel. When at least one reliable position-reference system is successfully
calibrated, return to the required operational mode.
2 When at least one reliable position-reference system is successfully calibrated,
return to the required operational mode.

385575/D 155
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Main modes and operating


procedures

This section contains the following topics:


Standby mode ................................................................................................................156
Joystick mode ................................................................................................................157
Auto Position mode .......................................................................................................163

Standby mode
The Standby mode is a waiting and reset mode in which the system is in a high state of
readiness, but in which no vessel control commands can be made. It is the default mode
when the system is first switched on. In Standby mode you can prepare the system
for operation.
From this mode, you can take the system to Joystick mode (see Joystick mode on
page 157) or start the built-in trainer (see Using the trainer on page 253).
Note
When in Standby mode, ignore any displayed position information.

In this mode you may also:


• Calibrate the joystick (see Calibrating the joystick on page 77).
• Enable the required gyrocompasses (see Gyrocompasses on page 111).
• Enable the required wind sensors (see Wind sensors on page 116).
• Enable the required VRSs (see Vertical reference sensors (VRS) on page 120).
• Enable the required speed sensors (see Sensors dialog box — Speed page on page 122).
• Enable the required draught sensors (see Sensors dialog box — Draught page on
page 125).
• Enable the required thrusters, propellers and rudders (see Enabling thrusters on
page 183).

156 385575/D
Main modes and operating procedures

Returning to Standby mode/manual levers


To return to Standby mode from any other mode:
1 Press the STANDBY button twice.
• The STANDBY button status lamp becomes lit.
2 Disable all position-reference systems.
3 Disable all thrusters, propellers and rudders.
4 If you are to use manual levers, switch from K-Pos DP thruster control to manual
thruster control (usually a switch or a button located on the main thruster control
panel).
• The K-Pos DP system provides Thruster not ready alarms.
Note
When switching to manual thruster control, thrusters, propellers and rudders are no
longer READY for K-Pos DP control (i.e. they lose their READY status).

Joystick mode
In Joystick mode, the operator controls the movement of the vessel using the three-axis
joystick.
The following applies if the operator is facing forwards or aft when looking at the
display screen:
• Moving the joystick forward/back controls the vessel in the surge axis.
• Moving the joystick left/right controls the vessel in the sway axis.
• Rotating the joystick rotates the vessel (the yaw axis).
The following applies if the operator is facing to port or starboard when looking at
the display screen:
• Moving the joystick forward/back controls the vessel in the sway axis.
• Moving the joystick left/right controls the vessel in the surge axis.
• Rotating the joystick rotates the vessel (the yaw axis).
Refer also to the following sections:
• Joystick Settings dialog box on page 73
• Thruster Allocation dialog box on page 186
• Rotation centre for joystick manoeuvring on page 75

385575/D 157
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

From Standby mode to Joystick mode


Note
Before using the joystick, it must be correctly calibrated. See Calibrating the joystick on
page 77.

To take the system from Standby mode to Joystick mode:


1 Ensure that the joystick is in the zero position in all three axes, and that it is
functioning correctly (see Joystick view on page 261).
2 Ensure that the required gyrocompasses are enabled (see Gyrocompasses on
page 111). See also Position and heading information on page 159.
3 Ensure that the required wind sensors are enabled (see Wind sensors on page 116).
4 Ensure that the required VRSs are enabled (see Vertical reference sensors (VRS)
on page 120).
5 Ensure that the required draught sensors are enabled (see Sensors dialog box —
Draught page on page 125).
6 Ensure that the required thrusters, propellers and rudders are enabled (see Enabling
thrusters on page 183).
7 If the vessel has a switch or button to select between manual and K-Pos DP thruster
control (usually located on the main thruster control panel), set this switch/button
to K-Pos DP.
8 Press the JOYSTICK button twice.
• The JOYSTICK button status lamp starts to flash and then becomes steadily
lit when the mode is entered.
9 Enable the required position-reference systems (see Methods for enabling
position-reference systems on page 135). See also Position and heading information
on page 159.

Joystick control of position and heading


To move the vessel along the surge and sway axes (alongships and athwartships
directions), tilt the joystick. The direction in which the joystick is tilted determines the
direction of applied thruster force, and the angle of tilt determines the amount of applied
thruster force.
To turn the vessel (the yaw axis), rotate the joystick. The direction in which the joystick
is rotated determines the direction of the turning force demand, and the angle through
which the joystick is rotated determines the amount of applied turning moment.
The Joystick view (see Joystick view on page 261) provides useful information in the
Joystick mode.

158 385575/D
Main modes and operating procedures

Position and heading information


It is not essential to enable either position-reference systems or gyrocompasses when
operating in Joystick mode. However, the estimated position, heading and speed
provided by the Vessel Model are meaningless if they have not been adjusted according
to measured information.
Note
If you do not enable any position-reference systems or gyrocompasses, you must ignore
any displayed position, heading or speed information.

Joystick electrical failure


Electrical failures affecting the joystick, such as an open loop or a short circuit, are
detected by the system. If the voltage read by the panel controller is outside predefined
limits, the joystick value for the actual axis is set to zero (it is no longer possible to
control the vessel in this axis using the joystick), and an alarm message is reported:
Joystick electrical failure <surge/sway/yaw>

Mixed joystick/auto modes


While remaining in Joystick mode, and provided the required gyrocompasses and/or
position-reference systems are enabled, you can select either one or two of the surge,
sway and yaw axes for automatic control:
• Press the YAW button for automatic heading control with joystick control of the surge
and sway axes (see Joystick mode with automatic heading control on page 159).
• Press the SURGE and SWAY buttons for automatic position control with joystick
heading control (see Joystick mode with automatic position control in both surge
and sway on page 160).
• Press the YAW and SURGE buttons for automatic heading control, automatic
stabilisation in the surge axis, and joystick control of the sway axis (see Joystick mode
with automatic stabilisation on page 161).
• Press the YAW and SWAY buttons for automatic heading control, automatic
stabilisation in the sway axis, and joystick control of the surge axis (see Joystick mode
with automatic stabilisation on page 161).
If you select all three axes for automatic control, the system automatically enters the
Auto Position mode (see Auto Position mode on page 163).

Joystick mode with automatic heading control


In Joystick mode with a gyrocompass enabled, you can select automatic heading control.
When automatic heading control is selected, the system automatically provides the
thruster control necessary to maintain this heading.

385575/D 159
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Refer also to the following sections:


• Gain dialog box on page 65
• Changing the heading setpoint on page 176
• Alarm Limits dialog box on page 63
• Rate Of Turn page on page 181

Selecting automatic heading control


To select automatic heading control while in Joystick mode:
1 Check that none of the status lamps for the SURGE, SWAY or YAW buttons are lit.
2 Ensure that the required gyrocompasses are enabled (see Gyrocompasses on
page 111).
3 Press the YAW button twice within four seconds.
• The YAW button status lamp starts to flash.
• The vessel rotation (Rate Of Turn) starts to slow down in a controlled manner at
a rate that depends on the selected controller gain.
• When the Rate Of Turn is reduced to less than a predefined limit, automatic
heading control is enabled and the YAW and PRESENT HEADING button status
lamps become steadily lit. The current vessel heading becomes the heading
setpoint, and the system automatically keeps the vessel on this heading.
• The deviation between the estimated heading and the heading setpoint is shown
on the Heading pane (see Dashboard layout on page 35).

Returning to joystick heading control


To return to joystick heading control:
1 Press the JOYSTICK button twice within four seconds.
• The YAW and PRESENT HEADING button status lamps become unlit.
2 Control the vessel's heading manually using the joystick.

Joystick mode with automatic position control in both surge


and sway
In Joystick mode, with an active gyrocompass and with an active position-reference
system, you can select automatic position control in both the surge and sway axes.
(Selection of only one of the surge and sway axes for automatic control is normally
combined with automatic heading (yaw) control, and is described in Joystick mode
with automatic stabilisation on page 161.)
Unless there is a specific operational requirement for joystick yaw control, it is better to
use the full Auto Position mode when changing position in order to allow the system to
maintain a constant heading during the manoeuvre.

160 385575/D
Main modes and operating procedures

Refer also to the following sections:


• Gain dialog box on page 65
• Changing the position setpoint on page 165
• Alarm Limits dialog box on page 63

Selecting automatic position control


To select automatic position control while in Joystick mode:
1 Check that none of the status lamps for the SURGE, SWAY or YAW buttons are lit.
2 Ensure that the required gyrocompasses are enabled (see Gyrocompasses on
page 111).
3 Ensure that at least one position-reference system is active and enabled (see Methods
for enabling position-reference systems on page 135).
4 Press the SURGE and the SWAY buttons twice within four seconds.
• The SURGE and SWAY button status lamps start to flash.
• The vessel starts to slow down (loose speed) in the surge and sway axes in a
controlled manner at a rate that depends on the selected controller gain.
• When the vessel speed (in both the surge and sway axes) is reduced to less than
predefined limits, automatic position control is enabled and the SURGE, SWAY
and PRESENT POSITION button status lamps become steadily lit. The current
vessel position becomes the position setpoint, and the system automatically
keeps the vessel at this position.
• The deviation between the estimated position and the position setpoint is shown
on the Position deviation pane (see Dashboard layout on page 35).

Returning to joystick position control


To return to joystick position control:
1 Press the JOYSTICK button twice within four seconds.
• The PRESENT POSITION, SURGE and SWAY button status lamps become unlit.
2 Control the vessel's position manually using the joystick.

Joystick mode with automatic stabilisation


In Joystick mode, with an active gyrocompass and with an active position-reference
system, you can select automatic stabilisation. This means that either:
• The yaw and surge axes are under automatic control while the sway axis remains
under joystick control.
or
• The yaw and sway axes are under automatic control while the surge axis remains
under joystick control.

385575/D 161
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Refer also to the following sections:


• Gain dialog box on page 65
• Changing the heading setpoint on page 176
• Alarm Limits dialog box on page 63
• Speed Setpoint dialog box on page 172
• Rate Of Turn page on page 181

Selecting automatic stabilisation


To select automatic stabilisation while in Joystick mode:
1 Check that none of the status lamps for the SURGE, SWAY or YAW buttons are lit.
2 Ensure that the required gyrocompasses are enabled (see Gyrocompasses on
page 111).
3 Ensure that at least one position-reference system is active and enabled (see Methods
for enabling position-reference systems on page 135).
4 Press the YAW button twice within four seconds.
• The YAW button status lamp starts to flash.
• The vessel rotation (Rate Of Turn) starts to slow down in a controlled manner at
a rate that depends on the selected controller gain.
• When the Rate Of Turn is reduced to less than a predefined limit, automatic
heading control is enabled and the YAW and PRESENT HEADING button status
lamps become steadily lit. The current vessel heading becomes the heading
setpoint, and the system automatically keeps the vessel on this heading.
• The deviation between the estimated heading and the heading setpoint is shown
on the Heading pane (see Dashboard layout on page 35).
5 Press either the SURGE or SWAY button twice within four seconds.
• The respective SURGE or SWAY button status lamp starts to flash.
• The vessel starts to slow down (loose speed) in the surge or sway axis in a
controlled manner at a rate that depends on the selected controller gain.
• When the vessel speed (in the surge or sway axis) is reduced to less than a
predefined limit, automatic position control in the selected axis is enabled and
the SURGE or SWAY button status lamp becomes steadily lit. The current vessel
position in the selected axis becomes the position setpoint in that axis, and the
system automatically keeps the vessel at this position.
• The deviation between the estimated position and the position setpoint is shown
on the Position deviation pane (see Dashboard layout on page 35).
6 Control the vessel movement in the unselected axis manually using the joystick.

Returning to joystick control


To return to joystick control in all axes:
1 Press the JOYSTICK button twice within four seconds.
2 Control the vessel's heading and position manually using the joystick.

162 385575/D
Main modes and operating procedures

Auto Position mode


In Auto Position mode, the system automatically maintains the heading and position of
the vessel. This mode requires at least one active gyrocompass and at least one active
position-reference system. The actual number of active sensors required depends on the
DP Class requirements for the operation to be performed.
Refer also to the following sections:
• Gain dialog box on page 65
• Thruster Allocation dialog box on page 186
• Changing the position setpoint on page 165
• Changing the heading setpoint on page 176
• Alarm Limits dialog box on page 63
• Rotation Center dialog box on page 70
• Quick model update on page 68
• DP online consequence analysis on page 256

From Joystick mode to Auto Position mode


To take the system from Joystick mode to Auto Position mode:
1 Ensure that none of the status lamps above the YAW, SURGE and SWAY buttons
are lit.
2 Ensure that at least one gyrocompass is active and enabled (see Sensors dialog
box — Gyro page on page 111).
3 Ensure that at least one position-reference system is active and enabled (see Methods
for enabling position-reference systems on page 135).
4 Ensure that either High Precision or Relaxed (if configured) is set as the selected
Controller Mode in the Gain dialog box.
5 Hold the vessel as stationary as possible using the joystick.
6 Press the AUTO POSITION button twice within four seconds.
• The AUTO POSITION button status indicator starts to flash and then becomes
steadily lit when the mode is entered.
• The YAW, SURGE and SWAY button status lamps start to flash.
• The vessel rotation (Rate Of Turn) starts to slow down in a controlled manner at
a rate that depends on the selected controller gain.
• The vessel starts to slow down (loose speed) in the surge and sway axis in a
controlled manner at a rate that depends on the selected controller gain.
• When the Rate Of Turn is reduced to less than a predefined limit, automatic
heading control is enabled and the YAW and PRESENT HEADING button status
lamps become steadily lit. The current vessel heading becomes the heading
setpoint, and the system automatically keeps the vessel on this heading.
• The deviation between the estimated heading and the heading setpoint is shown
in the Heading area of the display.

385575/D 163
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

• The vessel starts to slow down (loose speed) in the surge and sway axes in a
controlled manner at a rate that depends on the selected controller gain.
• When the vessel speed (in both the surge and sway axes) is reduced to less than
predefined limits, automatic position control is enabled and the SURGE, SWAY
and PRESENT POSITION button status lamps become steadily lit. The current
vessel position becomes the position setpoint, and the system automatically
keeps the vessel at this position.
• The deviation between the estimated position and the position setpoint is shown
on the Position area on the display.
If Green controller mode is desired, continue as follows:
7 Allow the vessel to stabilise in Auto Position mode for about 15 minutes to attain
optimal performance in the Green controller mode.
8 Select Green controller mode with the required area set in the Gain dialog box (see
Gain dialog box on page 65) and apply.
• The defined area is displayed on the Posplot view. The inner and outer areas are
indicated with dashed circles with green shading on the inner area.
Note
No change in position or heading should be attempted during the first five minutes after
entering Auto Position mode in order to allow the Vessel Model to stabilise. For critical
DP operations or during difficult weather/current conditions, this initial time period
should be extended to at least 15 minutes.

164 385575/D
Changing the position setpoint

Changing the position


setpoint

This section contains the following topics:


Stopping the movement during change of position .......................................................165
Marking a new position setpoint on the Posplot view ...................................................166
Position R/B dialog box (range/bearing) .......................................................................167
Position Inc dialog box (incremental)............................................................................167
Position dialog box ........................................................................................................168
Speed Setpoint dialog box .............................................................................................172
Acceleration/Deceleration Settings dialog box..............................................................173

Stopping the movement during change of


position
You can stop the movement of the vessel during change of position either by changing
the setpoint to the present position or, in some modes, by taking a pause (without
changing the setpoint).

Stopping by use of the Present Position button


To set the vessel's present position as the position setpoint, press the PRESENT
POSITION button twice within four seconds.
The PRESENT POSITION button status indicator starts to flash and then becomes
continuously lit when the vessel's present position is set as the position setpoint.

Stopping by use of the STOP button


To take a pause in the movement while changing the position:
1 Press the STOP button twice within four seconds. The vessel starts to slow down in
a controlled manner at a rate that depends on the selected controller gain.
2 The SURGE and SWAY button status lamps are flashing and the text 'SLOWDOWN'
is shown in the heading pane on the dashboard.
3 When the vessel comes to a stop the SURGE and SWAY button status lamps become
steadily lit and the text 'STOPPED' is shown in the heading pane on the dashboard.

385575/D 165
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Note
The position setpoint has not changed and the PRESENT POSITION button status
lamp is not lit.

4 Deselect the STOP button and the vessel will continue the movement to the defined
position setpoint.

Marking a new position setpoint on the


Posplot view
With the Posplot view displayed, you can change the position setpoint using the trackball.

1 Click on the position setpoint symbol in the Posplot view.


• The Position dialog box is displayed.

2 Move the setpoint symbol with the trackball.


• The setpoint symbol moves on the display and the position coordinates are
updated dynamically on the Position dialog box.
3 Click again to fix the setpoint symbol at the required position.

166 385575/D
Changing the position setpoint

• A temporary position setpoint symbol is displayed at the new position and the
coordinates, distance and both true and relative direction from the present
position setpoint are displayed on the Position dialog box.
4 Either click the OK button to accept the new position setpoint, or click the Cancel
button to continue using the existing setpoint.

Position R/B dialog box (range/bearing)


The Position R/B dialog box is useful in operations that require frequent changes of
position setpoint.
To display this dialog box, select Positioning→Position range/bearing.

Range
Enter the range from the Present Setpoint to the New Setpoint in this text box.
True Bearing
Enter the true bearing from the Present Setpoint to the New Setpoint in this text box.
A temporary setpoint symbol is displayed on the Posplot view showing the position of
the New Setpoint relative to the Present Setpoint.

Position Inc dialog box (incremental)


The Position Inc dialog box is useful in operations that require frequent changes of
position setpoint.
To display the dialog box, select Positioning→Position increment.

385575/D 167
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

You can enter an increment by typing a value into the increment spin box. You can adjust
the size of the increment by clicking on the up or down arrows next to the increment
spin box.
To add the selected increment in a particular direction to the New Setpoint coordinates,
click Ahead, Astern, PORT or STBD as appropriate. Each time you click one of these,
the New Setpoint coordinates are adjusted and the temporary setpoint symbol on the
Posplot view is moved accordingly.
Range
Shows the range from the Present Setpoint position to the New Setpoint position.
True Bearing
Shows the true bearing from the Present Setpoint position to the New Setpoint
position.

Position dialog box


The Position dialog box contains four tabbed pages (Inc, R/B, Absolute and Speed) that
allow you to specifying the required position setpoint in the following ways:
• Inc (Incremental) for defining the setpoint relative to the existing setpoint
• R/B for defining the setpoint using range and bearing
• Absolute for defining the setpoint using absolute coordinates
• Speed for specifying the speed at which the vessel should try to move during a change
of position
To display the dialog box, select Positioning→Position or press the CHANGE POSITION
button.

Inc page
The Inc (Incremental) page allows you to define the position setpoint relative to the
existing setpoint.
You can select either Relative or True increments. An increment can be entered by typing
a value into the increment spin box. The size of the increment can be adjusted by clicking
on the up or down arrows next to the increment spin box.
To add the selected increment in a particular direction to the New Setpoint coordinates,
click Ahead/Astern/Port/Starboard or North/South/East/West as appropriate. Each time
you click one of these, the New Setpoint coordinates are adjusted and the temporary
setpoint symbol on the Posplot view is moved accordingly.

168 385575/D
Changing the position setpoint

New Setpoint
Shows the coordinates that will be used for the new position setpoint when you
click the OK or Apply button.
A temporary setpoint symbol is displayed on the Posplot view showing the position
of the New Setpoint relative to the Present Setpoint.
Relative
This applies increments Ahead/Astern/Port/Starboard.
True
This applies increments North/South/East/West.
From Present Setpoint to New Setpoint
Shows the Range and True Bearing from the Present Setpoint position to the New
Setpoint position.

R/B page
The R/B page allows you to define the position setpoint using range and bearing.

385575/D 169
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

New Setpoint
Shows the coordinates that will be used for the new position setpoint when you
click the OK or Apply button.
A temporary setpoint symbol is displayed on the Posplot view showing the position
of the New Setpoint relative to the Present Setpoint.
To define a new position setpoint, enter the range and bearing in the Range and
Bearing text boxes.
Start position
Choose whether the new position setpoint is to be calculated relative to the Present
Setpoint or the Present Position by clicking the matching option button.
Bearing
Select either True or Relative bearing by clicking the matching option button.
From Present Setpoint to New Setpoint
Shows the Range and True Bearing from the Present Setpoint position to the New
Setpoint position.

Abs page
The Abs page allows you to define the position setpoint using absolute coordinates.

170 385575/D
Changing the position setpoint

New Setpoint
Shows the coordinates that will be used for the new position setpoint when you
click the OK or Apply button. You can enter New Setpoint coordinates by typing
the required coordinates directly into the New Setpoint boxes.
A temporary setpoint symbol is displayed on the Posplot view showing the position
of the New Setpoint relative to the Present Setpoint.
Previous Setpoint
Shows the coordinates of the previous position setpoint. Clicking the Use button
writes these coordinates into the New Setpoint boxes. This feature can be used to
return the vessel to a previous position.
From Present Setpoint to New Setpoint
Shows the Range and True Bearing from the Present Setpoint position to the New
Setpoint position.

Speed page
The Speed page allows you to specify the speed at which the vessel should try to move
during a change of position.
The speed setpoint applies only when the surge and sway axes are under automatic
control.
As the vessel approaches the position setpoint, the speed setpoint is reduced to zero.

385575/D 171
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

New Setpoint
Either enter the required value in the New Setpoint spin box, or use the up and down
arrows to adjust the setpoint by the selected increment or decrement defined in the
Increase/Decrease speed step spin box.
Note
If the speed setpoint is set to 0.0, the vessel will not change position.
If the speed setpoint has been set to 0.0 and the vessel's rotation centre has been set to
another position than Midships, it will not be possible to perform a change of heading.
This is because a heading change with a rotation centere other than Midships implies a
change of position which requires a speed setpoint that is not zero.

Speed Setpoint dialog box


The Speed Setpoint dialog box is useful in operations that require frequent changes of
speed setpoint as it allows you to specify the speed at which the vessel should try to
move during a change of position.
As the vessel approaches the position setpoint, the speed setpoint is reduced to zero.
This speed applies only when the surge and/or sway axes are under automatic control.
To display this dialog box, select Settings→(Control) Speed.

172 385575/D
Changing the position setpoint

Either enter the required value in the Speed Setpoint spin box, or use the up and down
arrows to adjust the setpoint by the selected increment or decrement defined in the
Increase/Decrease speed step spin box.
Note
If the speed setpoint is set to 0.0, the vessel will not change position.
If the speed setpoint has been set to 0.0 and the vessel's rotation center has been set to
another position than Midships, it will not be possible to perform a change of heading.
This is because a heading change with a rotation center other than Midships implies a
change of position which requires a speed setpoint that is not zero.

Acceleration/Deceleration Settings dialog


box
Acceleration and deceleration factors in the surge, sway and yaw axes can be
specified for Low Speed operation, and for operation in Relaxed Controller Mode. (In
Auto Position mode with High Precision Controller Mode selected, the Low Speed
acceleration/deceleration factors apply.) Acceleration and deceleration factors in the yaw
axis can be specified for High Speed operation.
Using the Acceleration/Deceleration Settings dialog box you can:
• Specify the acceleration and deceleration factors for the vessel speed in surge and
sway axes at start and finish of a commanded change of position.
• Specify the acceleration and deceleration factors for the vessel's Rate Of Turn at
start and finish of a commanded rotation.
To display the dialog box, select Settings→(Control) Acceleration and then click the
required page tab.

385575/D 173
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

The options available on the Low Speed and Relaxed Control pages are identical.
The acceleration/deceleration factors on the Low Speed page are those that are used when
neither Relaxed Control nor High Speed apply.
The acceleration/deceleration factors on the Relaxed Control page are those that are used
when Relaxed Controller mode is selected.
The acceleration/deceleration factors on the High Speed page are those that are used in
Auto Track (high speed) and Autopilot modes (refer to the separate Auto Track Mode
and AutoPilot Mode operator manuals).
Controller Reference
The acceleration and deceleration factors (Surge, Sway and Yaw) can be set
in the range 0.0 to 100%, and represent a percentage of maximum available
acceleration/deceleration. The selections on the Low Speed and Relaxed Control
pages are identical. On the High Speed page only acceleration/deceleration factors
in the Yaw axis can be specified.
Acceleration Factor
As the vessel starts a change of position, the vessel speed is increased to the speed
setpoint using the selected acceleration factors in the surge and sway axes.
As the vessel starts a change of heading, the Rate Of Turn is increased to the Rate
Of Turn setpoint using the selected acceleration factor in the yaw axis.
Decelaration Factor
As the vessel approaches the new position setpoint, the vessel speed is decreased
to zero using the selected deceleration factor in the surge and sway axes.

174 385575/D
Changing the position setpoint

As the vessel approaches the new heading setpoint, the Rate Of Turn is decreased
to zero using the selected deceleration factor in the yaw axis.

385575/D 175
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Changing the heading


setpoint

This section contains the following topics:


Stopping the rotation during change of heading ............................................................176
Marking a new heading setpoint on the Posplot view ...................................................177
Heading Wheel and its associated buttons.....................................................................178
Heading dialog box ........................................................................................................179
Acceleration/deceleration factors in the yaw axis .........................................................181
Note
It is not possible to perform a change of heading, even though you have entered a new
heading setpoint, when the Rate Of Turn setpoint is zero. Nor is it possible to perform
a change of heading when the vessel's rotation centre is set to a position other than
Midships and the position speed setpoint is zero.

Note
The different methods for changing the heading setpoint cannot be used at the same
time. When the Heading dialog box is open, you cannot mark a new setpoint on the
Posplot view.

Stopping the rotation during change of


heading
You can stop the rotation of the vessel during change of heading either by changing the
setpoint to the present heading or, in some modes, by taking a pause (without changing
the setpoint).

Stopping by use of the Present Heading button


To set the vessel's present heading as the heading setpoint, press the PRESENT
HEADING button twice. This will interrupt a requested change of heading, and if the
heading Strategy is System Selected, it will be changed to Operator Selected.

176 385575/D
Changing the heading setpoint

Stopping by use of the STOP button


To take a pause in the rotation while changing the heading:
1 Press the STOP button twice within four seconds. The vessel starts to slow down in
a controlled manner at a rate that depends on the selected controller gain.
2 The YAW button status lamp is flashing and the text 'SLOWDOWN' is shown in the
Heading pane on the dashboard.
3 When the vessel comes to a stop the YAW button status lamp becomes steadily lit
and the text 'STOPPED' is shown in the Heading pane on the dashboard.
Note
The heading setpoint has not changed and the PRESENT HEADING button status
lamp is not lit.

4 Deselect the STOP button and the vessel will continue the rotation to the defined
heading setpoint.

Marking a new heading setpoint on the


Posplot view
With the Posplot view displayed, you can change the heading setpoint using the trackball.

1 Click on the heading setpoint symbol in the Posplot view.


• The Heading dialog box is displayed.

385575/D 177
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

2 Move the setpoint symbol with the trackball.


• The setpoint symbol moves along the edge of the Posplot view and the heading
is updated dynamically on the Heading dialog box.
3 Click again to fix the setpoint symbol at the required heading.
• A temporary heading setpoint symbol is displayed.
• The New setpoint and the difference (Diff) from the Present Setpoint are displayed
on the Heading dialog box.
4 Either click the OK button to accept the new heading setpoint, or click the Cancel
button to continue with the existing setpoint.

Heading Wheel and its associated buttons


You can change the heading setpoint using the Heading
Wheel and its HEADING buttons (from left to right),
DECREASE, ACTIVATE and INCREASE (see Heading
wheel on page 27). To activate the Heading Wheel, one of
these three associated buttons must be pressed.

To change the heading setpoint:


Note
The system must have automatic heading control.

1 Press the DECREASE, ACTIVATE or INCREASE button once.


• The Heading Setpoint dialog box is displayed.

178 385575/D
Changing the heading setpoint

2 With the Heading Setpoint dialog box displayed, rotate the Heading Wheel clockwise
or counter-clockwise to increase (to starboard) or decrease (to port) the heading
setpoint, or use the INCREASE and DECREASE buttons (typically 0.1 degree for
each press).
Note
The Heading Setpoint dialog box must be displayed if rotation of the Heading Wheel is to
have an effect. When not used, the dialog box is automatically closed.

Heading dialog box


The Heading dialog box contains two tabbed pages (Heading and Rate Of Turn) which
allow you to change the heading setpoint and specify the Rate Of Turn.
To display the dialog box, select Positioning →Heading, or press the CHANGE HEADING
button.

Heading page
The Heading page of Heading dialog box allows you to define the heading setpoint.
While entering data on the Heading page, before you click the OK or Apply button,
a temporary heading setpoint symbol is displayed on the Posplot view showing the
proposed heading setpoint.
When System Selected is chosen as Strategy, the heading chosen by the system depends
on the current operational mode. For example, in Auto Position mode the system will
select the heading that requires the minimum power to be maintained in the current
environmental conditions. This heading will change continuously according to the
prevailing environmental forces on the vessel.

385575/D 179
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Note
When changing the heading setpoint, the turn direction will depend on the new heading
setpoint. The shortest turn is always used.

New Setpoint
Shows the heading that will be used as the new heading setpoint when you click
the OK or Apply button. When Operator Selected is chosen under Strategy, you
can enter the Heading Setpoint by typing the required heading or by increasing or
decreasing the value by clicking the arrows next to the New Setpoint spin box.
A temporary heading setpoint symbol is displayed on the Posplot view showing
the proposed heading setpoint.
Previous Setpoint
Shows the previous heading setpoint. Clicking the Use button writes this heading
into the New Setpoint box. You can therefore use this feature to return the vessel
to a previous heading.
Offset From Present Setpoint
Shows the difference in heading between the New Setpoint and the Present Setpoint.
This value is updated dynamically when you enter the new heading setpoint.
Strategy
System Selected
If you choose System Selected, the displayed system-selected heading is written
into the New Setpoint box. When you click the OK or Apply button, the system will
continue to determine what the heading setpoint should be.
This function is available when the environmental conditions are above a certain
limit. When system heading is selected, the alarm limits are turned off.

Operator Selected
If you choose Operator Selected, you can enter the Heading Setpoint using any
of the other methods described here.

180 385575/D
Changing the heading setpoint

Rate Of Turn page


The Rate Of Turn page allows you to define the speed at which the vessel should try to
rotate during a change of heading (the vessel's Rate Of Turn).
This Rate Of Turn applies only when the yaw axis is under automatic control.
As the vessel approaches the heading setpoint, the Rate Of Turn is reduced to zero.
When the vessel rotation centre is at a position other than the vessel's Midships position,
the actual Rate Of Turn may be less than the speed specified. This is because the speed of
movement of the Midships position is limited in proportion to the required vessel speed
and the distance of the rotation centre from the Midships position.
Note
It is not possible to perform a change of heading, even though you have entered a new
heading setpoint when the Rate Of Turn is zero.

New Setpoint
Either enter the required value in the New Setpoint box, or use the up and
down arrows to adjust the setpoint by the selected increment or decrement
(Increase/Decrease step).

Acceleration/deceleration factors in the yaw


axis
Acceleration and deceleration factors in the yaw axis can be specified for Low Speed
and High Speed operations, and for operation in Relaxed Controller Mode using the
Acceleration/Deceleration Settings dialog box. (In Auto Position mode with High Precision
Controller Mode selected, the Low Speed acceleration/deceleration factors apply.)

385575/D 181
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

To display the dialog box, select Settings→(Control) Acceleration and then click the
required page tab.

See Acceleration/Deceleration Settings dialog box on page 173 for more information
about this dialog box.

182 385575/D
Thrusters

Thrusters

This section contains the following topics:


Enabling thrusters ..........................................................................................................183
Automatic Thruster Start dialog box..............................................................................185
Thruster Allocation dialog box ......................................................................................186
Allocation Settings dialog box.......................................................................................189
Rudder/Nozzle control ...................................................................................................191
Power optimal allocation ...............................................................................................191
Power Optimal Allocation dialog box ...........................................................................192
Thruster biasing .............................................................................................................193
Thruster Biasing dialog box...........................................................................................193
Thruster Combinator Control Settings dialog box.........................................................204
Thruster Run-in dialog box............................................................................................205
Clutch Settings dialog box .............................................................................................206
The term “thruster” is used throughout this manual to mean any element of the vessel's
propulsion system; including propellers, rudders, tunnel thrusters and azimuth thrusters.
(The specific terms for the elements of the propulsion system are used whenever this
enhances the readability of the manual).

Enabling thrusters
When a thruster can be enabled for K-Pos DP control, the thruster is shown as Ready
on the Thruster main view (see Thruster main view on page 309) and on the Thruster
Enable dialog box.
There are generally two criteria for a thruster Ready status:
• The individual thruster must be running.
• The individual thruster must be available for K-Pos DP control.
The K-Pos DP system uses only those thrusters that are enabled for use by the system.
The thrusters can be enabled and disabled using the Thruster Enable dialog box. You
can also monitor if the thrusters are running and ready.
The THRUSTERS button group contains buttons used to enable or disable each of the
available thruster units for K-Pos DP control. Each thruster button has a status lamp
which is lit when the thruster is enabled.

385575/D 183
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Before a thruster can be enabled, it must be Ready. If a thruster is enabled and it


subsequently loses its Ready status, it is automatically disabled.

Thruster Enable dialog box


To display the dialog box, select Thrusters→Enable.

Thrusters /
Rudders
Enable/disable All
Selecting or clearing this check box allows you to enable or disable all thrusters
and rudders for K-Pos DP control simultaneously.
Running
These check boxes show whether the thrusters are running or not. When a thruster
status is set as running, the K-Pos DP ystem reads the feedback signal from the
thruster and calculates the resulting thruster force.
Under certain conditions, the operator can switch the thruster Running signals
on/off. The running status can be changed in this way only if all of the following
conditions are satisfied:
• The running status is not interfaced directly from the thruster to the K-Pos DP
system.
• The thruster is not Ready.
• The system configuration allows manual setting of thruster running status.
Rdy
These check boxes show whether the thrusters are Ready for K-Pos DP control.

184 385575/D
Thrusters

Enable
These check boxes allow you to enable or disable each of the thrusters for K-Pos
DP control. The system will automatically disable a thruster if it is not Ready,
i.e. clear the Enable check box, and also make the check box unavailable, thus
indicating that before a thruster can be enabled, it must be Ready.

Automatic Thruster Start dialog box


The Automatic Thruster Start function (for IAS deliveries) allows the system to enable
and start thrusters (and propellers) automatically when necessary. A thruster which
starts up automatically, can also be automatically enabled. Automatic thruster start and
enabling can be switched on and off using the Automatic Thruster Start dialog box. This
functionality requires IAS from Kongsberg Maritime.
The thrusters are divided into preconfigured groups, and each group is handled separately
related to the start request limit and delay specified by the operator.
To perform an automatic thruster start, the following conditions must be satisfied:
• The system must be in Auto Position mode or Joystick (not in Standby mode).
• No other automatic thruster start requests must be in progress in the group.
• No thrusters in the group must have been enabled for the past 100 seconds.
An additional thruster in a group will be started automatically if one of the following
conditions are satisfied:
• There are no enabled thrusters in the group.
• The force setpoint is greater than Start request limit for a period of time, and this
period of time is greater than the time limit set for Start request delay.
If a thruster fails to start, check if any other thruster in the same group was started up
manually without being enabled. If so, enable it.
To display the dialog box, select Thruster→Automatic Start.

385575/D 185
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Thruster Start
Turns on and off automatic start of thrusters in all groups.
Thruster Enable
Turns on and off automatic enabling of thrusters in all groups.
(thruster) Group
Start request limit
Allows you to set the force setpoint limit (in %) for automatic start of a thruster.
The force setpoint limit is set individually for each thruster group.
Start request delay
Allows you to set the delay (in seconds) following a violation of the start request
limit, before performing an automatic start of a thruster. The Start request delay is
set individually for each thruster group.

Thruster Allocation dialog box


Thruster allocation can be performed in many different ways. The functions that are
available for the vessel are listed on the Thruster Allocation dialog box.

186 385575/D
Thrusters

The configuration and operational requirements of the vessel determines the thruster
allocation modes that are implemented in the K-Pos DP system, as well as the criteria
for the automatic mode switch. Details of the available thruster allocation modes are
provided with the configuration information for each vessel.
For some of the modes (FIX, HEAVE RED, MANUAL FIX, and, when available,
ENVIRON FIX), a sufficient number of thrusters must be enabled to select the mode. The
system will automatically switch back to the default thruster allocation mode (normally
VARIABLE mode), if you deselect thrusters or thrusters lose their READY status.
To display the dialog box, select Thruster→Allocation Mode or press the ALLOC. SETUP
button.

Mode
For the azimuth thrusters, you can choose between various thruster allocation
modes. The currently-selected thruster allocation mode is shown both on the
Thruster Allocation dialog box and on the Thruster main view (see Thruster main
view on page 309).
Depending on the operational mode, illegal thruster allocation modes are
unavailable on the Thruster Allocation dialog box.
Some azimuth thruster allocation modes can be configured to comprise thruster
biasing. Thruster biasing (see Thruster biasing on page 193) can also be available
as a dedicated thruster allocation mode with its own name. The following are some
typical examples of azimuth thruster allocation modes:
VARIABLE
The system automatically changes the angle of the azimuth thrusters so that the
thrust is always angled in the optimum direction. In order to reduce wear and tear
on the azimuth thrusters due to continuous changes in the azimuth thruster angles,
a dead-band function is incorporated.
Use this mode when the environmental forces acting on the vessel are large and
are not constantly changing direction.

385575/D 187
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

A set of prohibited zones for each thruster can be predefined to prevent a particular
thruster from interfering with other thrusters, the hull or other equipment. What
happens to the thrust when a thruster passes a prohibited zone can be predefined
for each zone (for example, the thrust can be reduced).
FIX
The system automatically selects a fixed angle for each azimuth thruster. When the
environmental force is small and constantly changing direction, this mode can be
used in order to avoid continuous changes in the azimuth thruster angle.
If disabling and then re-enabling a thruster with a negative pitch or RPM, the
system will automatically turn the thruster 180°.
FIX WEATHER STBD
The system automatically selects a fixed angle for each azimuth thruster, suitable
for counteracting environmental forces from the starboard side.
ENVIRON FIX
A set of alternative, fixed angles are predefined for each azimuth thruster. The
system will choose the best predefined angle in the set, based on the direction of
the environmental forces when the mode is enabled.
If disabling and then re-enabling a thruster with a negative pitch or RPM, the
system will automatically turn the thruster 180°.
FIX WEATHER PORT
The system automatically selects a fixed angle for each azimuth thruster, suitable
for counteracting environmental forces from the port side.
DIVING
This is identical to VARIABLE azimuth mode except that the two modes have
separate configuration of prohibited zones. It is used to activate dedicated zones
during diving operations to prevent the sending of thruster wash towards the
umbilical or diving bell.
This mode can also be used to protect other kinds of equipment, such as HPR and
LTW, and will then be named accordingly.
What happens to the thrust when a thruster passes a prohibited zone can be
predefined for each zone (for example, the thrust can be reduced).
STEERING
Azimuth thrusters not used for steering will have predefined fixed angles for
use in Autopilot mode. This allocation mode is automatically selected when the
system is in Autopilot mode or in Auto Track (high Speed) mode (when the speed
is high-high).
HEAVE RED
When using heave reduction, excessive thrust is applied to increase the
hydrodynamic damping of the vessel. This reduces the motion of the vessel
induced by wave forces. The effect can be used to reduce the motions when
particularly critical operations are to be carried out, for example crane operations,
transfer of personnel, etc.

188 385575/D
Thrusters

The azimuth thrusters configured to participate in the motion reduction will be at


predefined azimuth angles, and they will as a minimum be run at a predefined force
limit, for example 50% force. The thruster angles are selected so that the resulting
thrust is zero when there is no thrust demand.
MANUAL FIX
In this mode the operator can freely set fixed azimuth angles of azimuth thrusters
and rudders/nozzles using the Allocation Settings dialog box (see Allocation
Settings dialog box on page 189).
Control
The configuration and operational requirements of the vessel determines the
controls that are implemented in the K-Pos DP system. Details of the available
controls are provided with the configuration information for the vessel.
The following are examples of thruster allocation controls:
Increased Power
Allows the thrusters to be used at more than their nominal rating for a limited
period of time (if the thrusters are designed to handle this) in order to survive
an emergency situation. The Increased Power is predefined for each thruster,
typically 10 to 20%. Normally, this mode needs a ready signal to be selected.
When the time period has expired, the thruster utilisation is automatically returned
to nominal values.
Position Priority
If both the rotational moment and directional force setpoint cannot both be met
due to insufficient available thrust, priority is normally set to obtain the rotational
moment setpoint (heading priority). Selecting Position Priority changes the thrust
allocation priority from heading to position.
Free Run
Allows a greater maximum pitch/rpm to enable the vessel to reach full speed when
running in Autopilot or Auto Track (high speed) mode. You can select between Off,
On and Automatic. When set to Automatic, free run is automatically selected when
Autopilot or Auto Track (high speed) mode is entered. The on/off state for free run
is also shown on the Thruster main view (see Thruster main view on page 309). The
contents of the Free Run group box may vary depending on vessel configuration.

Allocation Settings dialog box


The Allocation Settings dialog box allows you to set a fixed direction of azimuth
thrusters/rudders and/or specify rudder angle limits.
To display this dialog box, select Thruster→Allocation Settings.

385575/D 189
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Manual Fix angles


The operator can set fixed direction of azimuth thrusters/rudders by entering the
required direction (in degrees) in the Value text boxes and selecting the In Use
check boxes. An azimuthing unit which is not selected to have fixed angle, will be
rotated individually as required. The Thruster Main view (see Thruster main view
on page 309) shows which thrusters and/or rudders are using fixed angle.
Note
Manual Fix angles is only effective when the MANUAL FIX allocation mode is
selected (see Thruster Allocation dialog box on page 186).

Ignore Forbidden Azimuth Zones


When this is selected, the operator may set fixed azimuth angles that otherwise
would be within forbidden azimuth zones. Ignore Forbidden Azimuth Zones affects
only zones defined in the MANUAL FIX allocation mode.
Rudder Limit
The operator can specify angle limits within which the rudders are allowed to
operate. When the In Use check box is selected, the system will not turn the rudders
beyond the specified limit. These limits are shown on the Thruster main view:

190 385575/D
Thrusters

Rudder/Nozzle control
The Rudder/Nozzle Control function uses the rudder/nozzle to generate sideways thrust,
either as an addition to stern thrusters or alone if no lateral stern thrusters are available.
This function is designed for operation with two main propellers and
individually-controlled rudders/nozzles. The rudders may be of traditional or high
performance type.
For example, during station-keeping modes, one main propeller and rudder/nozzle are
used to generate forward directional thrust within the rudder/nozzle angle limits. The
second rudder/nozzle is set in the neutral position, and the second propeller is used to
reverse and counteract any excess thrust generated alongships by the first.
The operator can limit the MAX Rudder Angle (see Allocation Settings dialog box on
page 189), and can use the MANUAL FIX allocation mode (see Thruster Allocation
dialog box on page 186) when this is included in the delivery.

Power optimal allocation


Power optimal allocation is the primary barrier for preventing blackouts and requires the
same information as that required for Power Load Monitoring and Blackout Prevention
(see Power load monitoring and blackout prevention on page 208).
The power optimal allocation will first of all allocate thrust within the given power
limitations (denoted Normal mode).
For vessels with many separated switchboards it might be interesting to share the power
demand among the switchboards with respect to different optimization criteria.
Note
The available optimization criteria depend on the actual switchboard connections.
Insufficient thrust will result in automatic change to Normal mode.

385575/D 191
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Power Optimal Allocation dialog box


The mode for the power optimal allocation can be selected from the Power Optimal
Allocation dialog box.
To display the dialog box, select Thrusters →Power Optimal Allocation.

Normal
In this mode the power optimal allocation will first of all allocate thrust within
the given power limitations.
Even Load
In this mode the thrust is allocated so that the load is as even and as low as
possible on all connect-switchboards. The mode can also be used to prevent
unnecessary automatic standby start of generators and to give less wear and tear
on the generators.
Even Load (with zero bus-tie current flow)
In this mode the thrust is allocated so that the current through the operator
defined bus-tie is as low as possible. This functionality utilises the interface for
heavy-consumer load (one per switchboard). The hotel load is assumed to be
shared equally on the switchboards in a connect-switcboard.
Reduced swbd load mode
In this mode the operator can specify wanted maximum power consumption on
one or more connect-switchboards. The K-Pos DP system will allocate thrust

192 385575/D
Thrusters

so that the limits are normally not exceeded. The limits will be exceeded only
to avoid insufficient thrust, and will hence not reduce the DP capability in any
way. The mode can be used to prevent automatic standby start of generators on
operator-selected connect-switchboards. It can also be used to increase load on not
selected connect-switchboards to “clean” the associated diesel engines.

Thruster biasing
Thruster Biasing allows azimuth thrusters to counteract each other in groups so that
the resulting effect of the biasing is zero.
Each group can contain either two or three thrusters. Thruster biasing does not limit
the use of the thrusters since the counteraction will be reduced when the total demand
increases. The operator can specify the level of biasing.
Up to six thruster groups can be preconfigured.
This function is useful in the following situations:
• When an azimuth thruster cannot give zero thrust. Other azimuth thrusters or main
propellers can be used to compensate for this minimum force.
• When a higher power consumption is required (than what is actually needed for
positioning).
• When the weather is calm.
• When heave reduction is required combined with variable azimuth mode.
Depending on the vessel configuration, the Thruster Biasing function can also:
• Reduce the turning of azimuth thrusters when the force setpoint is changing, thereby
improving the effective thruster response and the positioning accuracy.
• Improve the damping of vessel motion.
The Thruster Biasing dialog box can be configured to suit the individual needs of each
vessel, and the contents (number and configuration of thruster groups and columns)
will tend to vary from vessel to vessel.
Two examples of the Thruster Biasing dialog box are described in the following sections.

Thruster Biasing dialog box


The content of the Thruster Biasing dialog box will vary according to system
configuration. The dialog box in the system installed on your vessel may display only
some of the items shown in the following examples, Manual selection of thruster biasing
and Automatically changing biasing available.
To display this dialog box, select Thrusters→Biasing.

385575/D 193
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Manual selection of thruster biasing

Group Name
The predefined name of the thruster group. The thruster groups are shown
colour-coded on the small thruster force model on the Thruster main view (see
Thruster main view on page 309).
In use
Select this check box to turn on the Thruster Biasing function for this thruster
group.
Thrusters
Shows the thruster numbers to counteract each other in each group. A special
situation is when there is only one thruster in a group. The text boxes for this
group then appear dimmed, with the thruster number shown only in the first text
box. With two or more thrusters in a group, you can define the thrusters to interact.
An error checking routine informs if:
• The same thruster number is specified twice in the same group.
• The same thruster number is specified in two different groups.
• An illegal thruster number is entered.
• An illegal thruster type is entered.
These checks only apply for thruster groups that have the In use check box selected.
Bias
The minimum force to be used for each thruster when running the thrusters to
counteract each other.
Turn factor
The thrusters will work towards each other (when the Inwards check box selected
(see Inwards on page 202) until this force level is reached. When this level is
reached, one thruster will turn, and they will both work in the same direction (see
Turn factor on page 200).
Angle factor
Determines the relative priority of angle against force to satisfy the force demand
(see Angle factor on page 201).

194 385575/D
Thrusters

Spin
If one thruster in this group is disabled and the other is not, and the demand to the
enabled thruster is less than the Bias force, you can choose to spin the enabled
thruster.
Inwards
When two thrusters are counteracting each other, you can choose between running
them towards each other (Inwards check box selected), or away from each other
(Inwards check box not selected) (see Inwards on page 202).

Automatically changing bias available

Thrusters
Shows the thruster numbers to counteract each other in each group. With two or
more thrusters in a group, you can define the thrusters to interact when By Operator
is selected (see Thruster Select below).
Bias
The minimum force to be used for each thruster when running the thrusters to
counteract each other. You can enter a required Bias value when By Operator is
selected (see Thruster Select below).
Thruster Select
Allows you to set the system to change bias pairs automatically as a function
of demand direction. In the Thruster Select group box, you can choose between
Automatic, By Operator or No Bias.
Used
A check mark in this column indicates the option (Automatic, By Operator or No
Bias) used by the system.

385575/D 195
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Automatic
When selected (see Figure 24), the Thrusters and Bias columns become dimmed,
i.e. unavailable for editing by the operator. The system selects thruster bias groups
automatically based on a predefined setting. The demand direction decides which
group setup is selected.
If a thruster becomes the only enabled thruster in a group, this thruster can (based
on certain criteria) join another group. The thrusters will then counteract each
other so that the resulting thrust is zero for this “new” group. When a thruster joins
a group, the thruster number is shown below the text Joined on the Thruster Biasing
dialog box, adjacent to the numbers of the other thrusters in the group.

Figure 24 Thruster Biasing - Thruster 4 has joined the group containing thruster 7 and
8 because thruster 5 is disabled

By Operator
With Thruster Select set to By Operator, the operator can select the thrusters in
each group by typing the required thruster numbers, and enter Bias values or
select Total Bias.

196 385575/D
Thrusters

No Bias
With Thruster Select set to No Bias, the system is still in thruster bias main thruster
allocation mode, but no bias is applied.
Total Bias
Use
When Use is selected, a total common bias can be entered. You can also monitor
the total applied bias on the dialog box.
Request
When the total bias is entered in this spin box, this bias value is distributed to all
of the bias groups. If the bias was initially equal for each group, the total bias is
distributed equally. If, however, the bias was initially unequal for each group, the
total will be distributed in the same proportion as the initial proportions.
Applied
This text box shows the difference of the thrust before and after total bias was
applied.
Bias Type
The Bias Type group box only becomes available when running in FIX thruster
allocation mode. The frame appears dimmed in all other thruster allocation modes.
You can select between PORT, STBD or Both in this frame. By default the Bias
Type is set to Both.
When running in FIX thruster allocation mode the K-Pos DP system automatically
selects a fixed angle for each azimuth thruster, i.e. the azimuth thrusters cannot
turn.
You can use the Bias Type settings in the Thruster Biasing function to work around
this restriction. Depending on the direction of applied thruster setpoint, removal of
the thruster biasing on specific thrusters in a group can be allowed. In this situation,

385575/D 197
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

the thruster will run below its bias value, including negative values (e.g. pitch/rpm).
The thruster will not turn, but the thruster force will be in the opposite direction.
In the following examples we have set (by operator) thrusters 7 and 8 to be in the
group 3 (and thus to counteract each other). The vessel is run in Joystick mode
using the joystick to control the thruster setpoint. The effects of the configured
Bias Types Both, PORT and STBD on thruster behaviour are described.
When Bias Type is set to Both and thruster setpoint to starboard, a bias is applied on
both thruster 7 and 8. Thruster 7 cannot turn because it is in FIX thruster allocation
mode (see Figure 25). The same will happen when you set the thruster setpoint to
port. Thruster 8 will not turn. None of the thrusters will go below the Bias value
you have set for the group 3.

Figure 25 Thruster allocation FIX combined with Bias Type Both

198 385575/D
Thrusters

Bias Type set to PORT.


Thruster setpoint to Starboard (illustrated
by the joystick symbol).
Starboard thruster (7) is allowed to go
negative (i.e. no bias on this thruster). It
will only go negative if the force setpoint is
not fulfilled by the PORT thruster (8).

Bias Type set to PORT.


Thruster setpoint to PORT (illustrated by
the joystick symbol).
Port thruster (8) stops at its bias value and is
not allowed to go negative.

385575/D 199
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Bias Type set to STBD.


Thruster setpoint to Starboard (illustrated
by the joystick symbol).
Starboard thruster (7) stops at its bias value
and is not allowed to go negative.

Bias Type set to STBD.


Thruster setpoint to PORT (illustrated by
the joystick symbol).
PORT thruster (8) is allowed to go negative
(i.e. no bias on this thruster). It will only go
negative if the force setpoint is not fulfilled
by the starboard thruster (7).

Turn factor
The Turn factor determines when to turn a thruster within a group, instead of continuing
to counteract the other thruster. In the examples below, the maximum force for each
thruster is 10 tonnes and the idle or bias force is 2 tonnes.

200 385575/D
Thrusters

Figure 26 Turn factor - examples

5 T demand
Starboard thruster counteracting
port thruster .
7T 2T

5.99 T demand
Port thruster about to reach 80%.
Starboard thruster will start turning.
7.99 T 2T

6.0 T demand
Port thruster reached 80%, so
starboard thruster turned.
3T 3T (Increasing turn factor to 90% would
turn starboard thruster back again.)
(CD3325)

Angle factor
The Angle factor determines the relative priority of angle against force to satisfy the
force setpoint. In the examples below, the same 10 tonnes demand ahead is achieved,
but more thrust is used in example 1 (with a higher angle factor), than in example 3
(with a lower angle factor).

385575/D 201
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Figure 27 Angle factor - examples

Example 1

Force demand = 10T ahead


Angle factor = 80%

Example 2

Force demand = 10T ahead


Angle factor = 60%

Example 3

Force demand = 10T ahead


Angle factor = 40%

(CD3326)

Inwards
When two thrusters are counteracting each other, the Inwards check box determines
whether they should be run towards each other or away from each other. The examples
below show various situations with Inwards both selected and not selected. The specified
setpoint is the force setpoint for this group.

202 385575/D
Thrusters

Figure 28 Angle factor - examples


Inwards selected Inwards not selected

Sway demand = 0 T Sway demand = 0 T


Bias = 3 T Bias = 3 T

3T 3T 3T 3T

Sway demand = 5 T Sway demand = 5 T


Bias = 2 T Bias = 2 T

7T 2T 2T 7T

Surge demand = -10 T Surge demand = -10 T


Bias = 5 T Bias = 5 T

Surge demand = 10 T Surge demand = 10 T


Sway demand = -5 T Sway demand = -5 T
Bias = 5 T Bias = 5 T

(CD3327)

385575/D 203
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Thruster Combinator Control Settings dialog


box
By combinator control of a thruster we mean that the K-Pos DP system controls both
pitch and RPM, and that pitch and RPM can be controlled individually.
To display the dialog box, select Thrusters→Combinator Control Settings.

Configuration
Minimum RPM %
For each of the listed thrusters, the operator can specify a minimum percentage
value for the RPM. The RPM will not fall below this limit when Sequential or
Stepwise Combinator Control Mode is selected.
Minimum RPM is not applicable for Full Combinator Control Mode and is therefore
unavailable (appears dimmed) when this mode is selected.
Combinator Control Mode
Sequential
The RPM is kept fixed at the Minimum RPM limit for low force demands. The
RPM will only increase if the force demand is higher than what can be dealt with
by varying the pitch. The pitch setpoint will always be +100% or –100% when the
RPM setpoint is higher than the Minimum RPM limit.
Stepwise
The RPM will be stepped up (respective down) if the filtered pitch setpoint is
higher (respective lower) than a predefined limit. The RPM will never be stepped
below the Minimum RPM limit.
This mode is designed with long term station-keeping in mind. In this mode the
thrusters will step the RPM automatically in varying weather conditions in order to
force the pitch setpoint into a desired working interval.
Full
The pitch and the RPM follows a predefined trace (combinator curve) with regards
to the force demand.
Full Combinator Control Mode is similar to the way pitch and RPM is controlled in
combinator mode during manual thruster lever control.

204 385575/D
Thrusters

Thruster Run-in dialog box


The Thruster Run-in dialog box allows you to limit the maximum thruster setpoint of
each individual thruster configured with this functionality.
To display the dialog box, select Thrusters→Run-in.

Configuration
Enable
Select a check box to turn on the Thruster Run-in function for the corresponding
thruster.
MAX setpoint (%)
The maximum setpoint for the corresponding thruster in percent. The specified
value must be more than any required minimum setpoint for the thruster (such as
for minimum thrust or idle rpm) and must always be at least 20%. This value is
valid for both the positive and negative directions.
For thrusters with combined pitch/rpm control, the specified maximum setpoint
refers to either the pitch or the rpm setpoint, depending on the configuration.
The maximum setpoint zones are shown for each selected thruster om the Thruster
main view:

385575/D 205
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Clutch Settings dialog box


If the system loses control of one of the propellers, it has to compensate for the idle force.
Otherwise, if the demand is below this we will get insufficient thrust and the allocation
will give up and position will be lost. In such situation the operator can specify when
the system should clutch in and out based on demand as a certain percentage of the idle
force. It is also possible to do continuous pulsing and to specify the periodic length and
minimum clutch activation time.
To display the dialog box, select Thruster→Clutch settings.

206 385575/D
Thrusters

Clutch Strategy
Select the required strategy; Off, Demand Limit or Continuous Pulse.
Demand
Specify when the thrusters should clutch in and out based on demand as a certain
percentage of the idle force. These limits will be used when the Clutch Strategy
Demand Limit is selected.
Clutch in limit
The clutch is activated when the demand reaches this limit (percentage of the
idle force).
Clutch out limit
The clutch is deactivated when the demand falls below this limit (percentage of
the idle force).
Continuous Pulse
Continuous Pulse means cyclic operation of the clutch to achieve an average of
the allocated thrust.
Pulse period
The duration (in seconds) of each clutch pulse cycle.
Clutch active minimum
The minimum duration of time (in seconds) the clutch is activated for each clutch
pulse cycle. If the calculated clutch activation time is less than this value, the
thruster will not be clutched in. Increasing this value will reduce the wear and tear
of the clutch at the cost of position accuracy.

385575/D 207
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Power system

This section contains the following topics:


Power monitoring ..........................................................................................................208
Power load monitoring and blackout prevention ...........................................................208

Power monitoring
The K-Pos DP system has no direct control over the vessel's electrical power system.
This is administered by a separate Power Management System (PMS).
Normally the K-Pos DP system receives information about:
• The power produced by each main generator.
• Which switchboard each generator is connected to.
• How the switchboards are connected.
• How the thrusters are connected to the switchboards.
This information is used by the K-Pos DP system for power overload control and is also
displayed on the Power view (see Power view on page 285).

Power load monitoring and blackout


prevention
The Power Load Monitoring function monitors the total load on the connected
switchboards and checks for unbalanced load. It will also act upon input failures from
equipment connected to the power distribution network, e.g. generators. Single failures
will be handled in such way that the Power Optimal Allocation and the Blackout
Prevention will still work. The Blackout Prevention function is the last barrier in the
K-Pos DP system to prevent overload on the connected switchboards. Some functions
in the K-Pos DP system can add thrust to the resulting thrust from the Power Optimal
Allocation, which might lead to an overload situation if not handled by the Blackout
Prevention function. The Blackout Prevention function will reduce the thrust demand if
the estimated load exceeds the nominal limit. The reduction is done as percentage wise
distribution of phase back power according to the rated power for each thruster.

208 385575/D
Power system

The Blackout Prevention function will only limit thruster commands to avoid a stable
power plant becoming overloaded. The function cannot prevent a potential blackout
caused by generator tripping.
The Power Load Monitoring and Blackout Prevention functions cover the following
standard power plant configurations:
• diesel generators supplying thruster/propeller drives
• shaft generators supplying thruster drives
• a combination of diesel generators and shaft generators
This function supplements the vessel's Power Management System (PMS). The
thruster/propeller setpoint reduction criteria during DP control are set at lower overload
levels than the load reduction initiated by the vessel's own PMS. The Power Load
Monitoring and Blackout Prevention functions are active in all operational modes and
are illustrated in Figure 29.

Figure 29 Power Load Monitoring and Blackout Prevention functions

The K-Pos DP system requires the following information in order to perform blackout
prevention:
• Generator power and breaker status
• Bus-tie breaker status
• Thruster breaker status (if more than one for each thruster)
The following functions are also available:
• Generator Load Limitation
Performs load limitation of the most loaded generator if a skew-load situation occurs
on the connect-switchboard. The overload protection is achieved by automatically
reducing the pitch/rpm/force/load on the thrusters/propellers connected to the
connect-switchboard until the most loaded generator operates within its nominal
capacity.

385575/D 209
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

• Diesel Engine Load Limitation


Monitors the load on each diesel engine (fuel-rack monitoring) which drives both a
generator and a controllable-pitch propeller on the same shaft. Power load is reduced
by reducing the pitch setpoint on the connected propeller when the nominal engine
load is exceeded. Note that this function requires an interface to the diesel engine
fuel-rack reading.
• Diesel Engine Load Monitoring
Monitors the load on each diesel engine (fuel-rack monitoring) which drives a
controllable-pitch propeller. This function requires an interface to the diesel engine
fuel-rack reading. This function is for presentation purposes only, and does not
perform any load limitation.
• Thruster Load Monitoring (Current/Power)
Monitors the current/power load on each individual thruster/propeller motor. Note
that this function requires an interface for the motor current/power reading.

210 385575/D
System status information

System status information

This section contains the following topics:


Remote Diagnostics dialog box ..................................................................................... 211
pcAnywhere Waiting... dialog box ................................................................................213
Print Status dialog box ...................................................................................................213
Export Log Files dialog box ..........................................................................................216
About dialog box ...........................................................................................................216

Remote Diagnostics dialog box


Online support from Kongsberg Maritime is available through the Remote Diagnostic
Service using secure communication facilities. The service engineer at the Support
Centre can view the same Operator Station information as the operator on site. Log files
and databases can be transferred to the Support Centre for further analysis, and updates
may take place on the system on site with the restrictions imposed by the operational
guidelines and the classification authorities.
The K-Pos DP system is prepared for this Remote Diagnostic Service by means of a
communication software package installed in each Operator Station.
To display the dialog box, select Tools→Remote Diagnostics.

385575/D 211
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Remote Access Services


A remote user is connected on the Remote Access Services connection when
information about Port, User and Duration is displayed in the corresponding text
fields.
Port
The port to which the modem is connected.
User
The user name of the remote user.
Duration
Duration of time since the remote user was connected to the Remote Access
Service connection.
Disconnect
Click this button to disconnect from the Remote Access Services.
PcAnywhere
Start
Click this button to start PcAnywhere when a remote user is connected on the
Remote Access Services port. The remote user is connected when information
about Port, User and Duration is displayed in the corresponding text fields.
Show
When PcAnywhere is started, the text on the Start button changes to Show. Click
the Show button to open the pcAnywhere Waiting... dialog box to monitor the
TCP/IP Host Service and TCP/IP addresses.

212 385575/D
System status information

Close
Click this button to close the Remote Diagnostics dialog box.

pcAnywhere Waiting... dialog box


The service engineer at the Kongsberg Maritime Support Centre may ask you to present
information about the TCP/IP Host Service (remote user) to verify that the required
connections are established. This information can be found on the pcAnywhere Waiting...
dialog box.
The dialog box is only available from the Remote Diagnostics dialog box.
To display this dialog box, select Tools→Remote Diagnostics and then click the Start
button for PcAnywhere. When PcAnywhere has started, click the Show button on the
Remote Diagnostics dialog box.

Note
To minimise the pcAnywhere Waiting... dialog box, do not click the Cancel button, as this
will abort pcAnywhere. Instead, click the Windows minimize button ( ) in the upper
right corner of the dialog box.

Print Status dialog box


You can print a predefined set of system status data on the event printer connected to
the Operator Station. You can either request an immediate printout or request repeated
printouts with a given time interval.

385575/D 213
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

The Print Status dialog box allows you to print the status page or to request repeated
printouts.
To display the dialog box, select System→(Printer Settings) Print Status.

Print Status
Click this button to request an immediate printout of the status page.
Cyclic Print Control
Select the Cyclic Print check box if you want a cyclic printout to be made
automatically after a specified Interval. This can only be selected from the
Operator Station in command.

214 385575/D
System status information

Figure 30 Status page (example)

385575/D 215
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Export Log Files dialog box


It is possible to export messages sent from different logging systems, such as from the
panel driver, from the DP recorder and the process stations.
To display the Export Log Files dialog box, select System→Export Log Files .

Select time span and file types


Each of the values can be increased or decreased by 1, after selecting the respective
field. e.g. hours, minutes, etc., or you can type the value.
The type of files are selected by the respective check box.
Select target for export
Logged data can be exported to the hard drive or to any removable drive. If you
cannot see all the available drives — click the Refresh button. You can change the
drive, but the folder name is always the same and that is why you are warned that
the existing files in this folder will be removed.

About dialog box


The About dialog box allows you to view vital K-Pos DP system and file information.
This information can be useful for you to have available when contacting Kongsberg
Maritime for help in case of problems with the K-Pos DP system. It contains an overview
of basic software information for your K-Pos DP system.

216 385575/D
System status information

The dialog box is always available.


To display the dialog box, select System→(Help) About.

Clicking the EXE/DLLs button displays a list of EXE and DLL files in use and their
corresponding version numbers.

Clicking the Overview button returns to the overview of software information.


Clicking the Details>> button displays a detailed list of which EXE files use which DLL
files.

385575/D 217
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

The structure of the information presented is as follows:


• The Program (EXE) column lists all the EXE files.
• The Using DLL column lists a batch of all the DLL files used by each specific EXE file.
• The Version column lists the version of the program (EXE file).
• The Modified column lists the date when each DLL and EXE file was last modified.
• The Size column lists the file size for each DLL and EXE file.
Clicking the Overview button returns to the overview of software information.
Clicking the Details<< button returns to the list of EXE and DLL files in use.

218 385575/D
System status monitoring

System status monitoring

This section contains the following topics:


Introduction....................................................................................................................219
System architecture........................................................................................................219
Equipment dialog box ....................................................................................................223
Station Explorer dialog box ...........................................................................................230
IO Manager dialog box ..................................................................................................232
RBUS IO Image.............................................................................................................235
IO Terminal Block dialog box .......................................................................................239
IO Point Browser dialog box .........................................................................................244
Properties — DpPs Serial port.......................................................................................247
Resetting a disabled serial line.......................................................................................250

Introduction
Functions are available for monitoring the status of the K-Pos DP operator stations,
process stations and IO system.
During normal operation you can:
• View the operational status of the Operator Stations, History Stations and Process
Stations.
• View information and status indications for every IO driver, IO block and IO point
configured in the system.

System architecture
A K-Pos DP system consists of one or more operator stations (OS) and one or more
process stations (PS). A history station (HS) may also be included.
The K-Pos DP control software is implemented in one, two or three process stations
(DpPSs) (the Main controller PS group) depending on the redundancy level of the
system. The process stations are implemented in computers located in the K-Pos DP
Controller Cabinet.

385575/D 219
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

The DpPSs in the Main controller group are interconnected via a dedicated redundancy
net (RedNet).
Communication between operator stations, history stations and process stations is via
a single or dual communication net (Net A and Net B).
Communication with thrusters and sensors is performed by the IO system, which is
an integrated part of the DpPS. If additional IO is required for sensors or thrusters,
additional dedicated IO process stations can be implemented.
The process stations themselves provide no permanent storage of programs and data.
When a process station starts up, all its programs and data are loaded from its PS servers,
which are located either on one or more operator stations or in the flash memory of
the PS itself.

Operator stations
The following standard names are used to identify the operator stations and history
stations in K-Pos DP systems:
OS name OS description
DP-OS1 Main Operator Station
DP-OS2 Main Operator Station
DP-OS3 Main Operator Station
DP-OS4 Fire Backup Operator Station
DP-OS6 Stand-alone Simulator Operator Station
DP-HS1 Main History Station
cPos-OS1 cPos Operator Station
cPos-OS2 cPos Operator Station
cJoy-OT1 cJoy Operator Terminal
cJoy-OT2 cJoy Operator Terminal
WT1 cJoy (cWing) Wing Terminal
WT2 cJoy (cWing) Wing Terminal
WT3 cJoy (cWing) Wing Terminal
WT4 cJoy (cWing) Wing Terminal

Process stations
The process stations are implemented in Remote Control Units (RCUs).
The RCU unit contains a real-time single board computer and IO interfaces in the same
unit.

Redundancy
In single systems, the DP Controller Cabinet contains a single DpPS.

220 385575/D
System status monitoring

In dual systems, the DP Controller Cabinet contains two DpPSs which operate with
a master/slave relationship. Switching between master and slave can be performed
manually, or the switching can be performed automatically by the system.
In triple systems, the DP Cabinet contains three DpPSs. The concept of majority voting
is used to detect and isolate faults in the sensors and in the system itself.
For more information, see Redundant systems on page 104.

WinPS
A WinPS is a Process station that runs on an OS computer, as opposed to a standard
PS. A WinPS provides full PS functionality, except that it cannot communicate with
the IO system.
WinPSs are used for development purposes and in simulators.

PS names and numbers


The following standard names and numbers are used to identify process stations and
redundancy groups in K-Pos DP systems.
Redundancy Redundancy type PS description
group
DpMain Single, DpDual or DpTriple Main Controller PS A
Main Controller PS B
Main Controller PS C
DpM_IO1 Single, DpDual or DpTriple Main Input/Output 1
DpM_IO2 Single, DpDual or DpTriple Main Input/Output 2
DpM_Sim Single Main - Simulator (WinPS)
DpM_Vrm Single Main - Built-in Trainer - Vessel Reference Model (WinPS)
DpFS_Vrm Single Field Simulator - Vessel Reference Model (WinPS)
DpBackup Single Backup DP Controller PS A
DpB_IO1 Single Backup Input/Output 1
DpB_IO2 Single Backup Input/Output 2
DpB_Sim Single Backup - Simulator (WinPS)
DpB_Vrm Single Backup - Vessel Reference Model (WinPS)

The Vessel Reference Models run in WinPS and provide simulator and built-in trainer
functions.

IO system
The IO system provides the communication interface for exchange of IO signals between
the field devices (thrusters and sensors) and the process station.
The main elements of the IO system are:
• IO drivers

385575/D 221
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

IO drivers are responsible for the communication with the field device. The IO driver
provides conversion between field values and IO raw values.
The following driver types are supported:
– RBUS for discrete analog and digital IO
– NetIO for communication between PSs
– Dedicated sensor and interface drivers for serial line devices such as Artemis,
GPS, Fanbeam and HPR
– ComAs for generic serial line IO
• IO blocks
An IO block represents a group of identifiable IO signals from an IO device in the
field. For example:
– For IO cards belonging to the RBUS driver, an IO block represents an IO card in
the IO rack.
– For NetIO communication between process stations, an IO block may represent all
the signals related to a particular sensor or thruster.
• IO points
IO points are the connection points for IO signals. An IO point may provide signal
conditioning elements for conversion between the IO raw value on the driver side
and the engineering value on the K-Pos DP system side.

Monitoring functions
The following monitoring functions are available:
• Viewing of status information for the Operator Stations, History Stations and Process
Stations in your system, using the Equipment - System Status dialog box. See
Equipment dialog box on page 223.
• Viewing of status information for all PSs in the system, using the Station Explorer
dialog box. See Station Explorer dialog box on page 230.
• Viewing of overview information for all IO drivers, IO blocks and IO points, using
the IO Manager dialog box. See IO Manager dialog box on page 232.
• Viewing of information for selected IO Points using the IO Point Browser dialog box.
See IO Point Browser dialog box on page 244.
• Viewing of information displayed for each IO Block, related to each IO Point and
its contents, using the IO Terminal Block dialog box. See IO Terminal Block dialog
box on page 239.
• Viewing of information for selected DP PS Serial ports using the Properties — DpPs
Serial port dialog box. See Properties — DpPs Serial port on page 247.
Note
Many of the features provided by these dialog boxes are related to configuring the
system. These features require OS Configuration Mode and/or PS Configuration Mode
and therefore are not described in this manual. This manual only describes features that
are available in normal operation mode.

222 385575/D
System status monitoring

Equipment dialog box


The Equipment - System Status dialog box shows operational status information about the
Operator Stations, History Stations and Process Stations in your system.
To display the dialog box, select System→Equipment.

This dialog box has five pages:


• PS
• PS Redundancy
• OS/HS
• Event Printer
• Net Status
In each line of each page, the background colour of certain fields are changed to indicate
alarm conditions.
When a system or process alarm condition occurs, the background of the field changes
colour and starts to flash. It will continue to flash until the applicable alarm is
acknowledged.
The pages have a shortcut menu. Right-click anywhere on the page to display the
following menu:
Print Image.. see Print Image on page 229.
Station Explorer... see Station Explorer dialog box on page 230.
PS Info... not relevant for K-Pos DP systems during normal
operation.
PS Operation... for use by Kongsberg Maritime engineers only.
System Events... see Presentation of messages on page 81.
IO Manager... see IO Manager dialog box on page 232.
IO Point Browser... see IO Point Browser dialog box on page 244.

385575/D 223
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

PS page
The PS page shows the current status of all process stations defined in the system.

Station
Identification of the PS.
Group name
Displays the name of the redundancy group to which this station belongs.
(No column title)
Identification of the PS within the redundancy group. For example: Controller PS
A, B or C within the DpMain group.
Status
Shows the current status of the PS:
• Operational — PS is operational.
• Booting — PS is booting (loading configuration).
• Rebooting — PS is rebooting due to an error.
• Not Communicational — PS has reported a status, but no communication with
the PS is possible.
• Not Reported — PS has not reported any status.
• Halt — PS has stopped due to an error condition.
Spare Time (%)
The available CPU capacity, expressed as a percentage of total CPU capacity.
Net State
Indicates the state of the A and B network interfaces:
• OK — Both network interfaces are OK.
• A-ERROR — Error on network interface A.
• B-ERROR — Error on network interface B.
• AB-ERROR — Error on both network interfaces.
I/O Status
Shows the status of the IO system for this PS:
• OK — No errors reported.

224 385575/D
System status monitoring

• ERROR — Errors reported.


Serial Status
Not relevant for K-Pos DP systems.
Other Status:
Shows the status of other sub-systems reported by this station (typically system
self-test and monitoring):
• OK — No errors reported.
• ERROR — Errors reported.
Free Memory
Available memory (or largest continuous block) in kB. (Not applicable for
WinPSs.)
Uptime
The accumulated uptime of the station. Shown as a number followed by a character
indicating the period. For example: 3.06 d indicates 3.06 days (m = minutes, h
= hours, d = days, y = years).
Started
Time stamp when the PS was started.
Format: day/month/year hour:min:sec
Last Reported
Time stamp of last communication.
Format: hour:min:sec

PS Redundancy page
The PS Redundancy page shows redundancy information for all process stations.

Station
Identification of the PS.
Group name
Displays the name of the redundancy group to which this station belongs.

385575/D 225
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

(No column title)


Identification of the PS within the redundancy group. For example: Controller PS
A, B or C within the DpMain group.
Status
Shows the current status of the PS:
• Operational — PS is operational.
• Booting — PS is booting (loading configuration).
• Rebooting — PS is rebooting due to an error.
• Not Communicational — PS has reported a status, but no communication with
the PS is possible.
• Not Reported — PS has not reported any status.
• Halt — PS has stopped due to an error condition.
Online
Displays whether the PS is online or not. See Redundant systems on page 104.
Master
Displays whether the PS is master or not. See Redundant systems on page 104.
Capability
Displays the Capability status, indicating to what extent the PS is technically
capable of fulfilling its intended purpose:
• OK — No errors.
• Common Error — Errors that are common to all PSs in the redundancy group.
• Degraded — Errors that related to only this PS in the redundancy group.
• Incapable — The PS is in a state where it should not be used as the master or
online computer.
Running mode
Displays the Running mode:
• Running — The PS is communicating and has finished all startup preparations.
• Starting — The PS is communicating, but more startup preparation is needed.
• Inactive — The PS is not communicating. It may be initializing or loading,
or not executing at all.
Type
Displays the redundancy type for the redundancy group.
For the DpMain and DpM_IO groups, the following types are relevant: Single,
DPDual and DPTriple.

OS/HS page
The OS/HS page shows the status of the operator stations and history stations that are
defined in the system.

226 385575/D
System status monitoring

Station
Identification of the OS or HS.
Status
Shows the current status of the OS or HS:
• Operational — OS or HS is operational.
• Not Communicational — OS or HS has reported a status, but no communication
with the OS or HS is possible.
• Not Reported — OS or HS has not reported any status.
• Stopped — OS or HS is not switched on.
Last Reported
Time stamp of last communication.
Format: day/month/year hour:min:sec
Net State
Indicates the state of the A and B network interfaces:
• OK — Both network interfaces are OK.
• A-ERROR — Error on network interface A.
• B-ERROR — Error on network interface B.
• AB-ERROR — Error on both network interfaces.
The OS/HS page has a shortcut menu. Right-click anywhere on the page to display
the following menu:

See Print Image on page 229.

Event Printer page


The Event Printer page shows the status of the event printers that are configured in
the system.

385575/D 227
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

The operator stations in the K-Pos DP system are grouped into Print Groups - usually
either Main or Backup - where each group has one event printer. Only one of the operator
stations (the Master) within a print group will print alarm messages to the event printer.
If the Master operator station becomes inactive for any reason, the role of event printer
Master passes automatically to another active Master of the Print Group.
Station
The address of the event printer.
Print Group
The name of the group of operator stations that can print to this printer.
Master
The current master operator station in this print group.
Members
The operator stations that are members of this print group. If an operator station is
not active, its name is shown in parentheses.
Printer Info
Information on the printer status such as Idle or Printing. This information is
provided by the printer interface.
The Event Printer page has a shortcut menu. Right-click anywhere on the page to display
the following menu:

See Print Image on page 229.

Net Status
The Net Status page shows the status of the communication network for all OSs, HSs and
PSs in the system.

228 385575/D
System status monitoring

This page contains a window that is divided into two panes. The left-hand pane lists all
stations in the communication network by means of icons and names. Clicking any icon
or name displays in the right-hand pane the status of the communication network as seen
from the receiving station in the left-hand pane.
If a red A, B or AB is displayed superimposed on an icon, this indicates that the station
has a network communication error on net A, B or both.
Sending Station
Identification of the OS, HS or PS sending messages to the receiving station.
Msg pr. 100 sec
The total number of messages being received every 100 seconds on both networks.
Lost Msg Net A
The number of lost messages on network A.
Lost Msg Net B
The number of lost messages on network B.
IpAddress
The Internet Protocol (IP) address of the sending station.
The right-hand pane is static and once information has been displayed it is not updated.
You can update the information either by reselecting the Net Status page or by
right-clicking anywhere on the page to display the following shortcut menu:
Select Print Image to print the content of the current page.
Select the Update Statistics command to update the statistical
information for the selected station in the right-hand pane.
Select the Show only errors command to filter the information
displayed in the right-hand pane so that only the stations with lost
messages are displayed.

Print Image
The Print Image command on the shortcut menu of the PS, PS Redundancy, OS/HS or Net
Status page allows you to print the content of the current page on your printer.

385575/D 229
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Selecting this command displays the Print dialog box.

Select the appropriate printer from the Printer drop-down list box.

Station Explorer dialog box


The Station Explorer provides system status information for all system components in a
selected process station, such as:
• For the basis system: applicable PS system information, self-tests and environment
checks (such as temperature check, fan alarm).
• For the IO Manager: information on all nodes and subnodes of all configured IO parts.
• For the Network: information on the redundant networks - Net A and Net B.
All nodes in the process station are represented by graphical symbols showing their
current alarm status.
To display the dialog box, select System→Equipment. Right-click on a PS line. Select
Station Explorer... from the shortcut menu.
Note
If the dialog box is empty, you have to select the required DpPs from the drop-down list.

PS tree structure
The dialog box provides a tree structure showing all the nodes and subnodes
in the PS. The tree structure can be expanded and collapsed, to display or hide
information details. Graphical symbols are displayed to indicate the alarm status.

230 385575/D
System status monitoring

Hotspot symbols provide links to dialog boxes for displaying further information
about the IO system.
Alarm status indicators
The following alarm status indicators may be displayed on the PS status view pane.
There is an error condition in this equipment node, and the
alarm is not acknowledged. When acknowledged, a red circle is
displayed .
The error condition in this equipment node is no longer present,
but the alarm is not acknowledged. When acknowledged, a green
circle is displayed (see below).
There is an error condition in this equipment node and the alarm
is acknowledged.
The red arrow indicates that there is either an error or an
unacknowledged alarm in one or more equipment subnodes.
Node and all sub equipment nodes are OK.

Hotspots
Hotspot symbols provide links to dialog boxes for displaying further information
about the IO system:
Displays the Properties dialog box, which shows an overview of
the software and hardware status of the selected PS. This feature
is intended only for Kongsberg Maritime personnel.
Displays the IO Manager dialog box, which shows the status of
the IO drivers and IO blocks for the selected PS. See IO Manager
dialog box on page 232.
Displays the Driver Properties dialog box for the selected IO
driver. This feature is intended only for Kongsberg Maritime
personnel.

Displays a submenu:

• For an IO driver:

– The Show RBUS IO Image command displays a graphical


view of the IO cards. See RBUS IO Image on page 235.
– The Show IO Driver command displays the Driver
Properties dialog box for the selected IO driver. This
feature is intended only for Kongsberg Maritime personnel.
• For an IO block (IO card):

385575/D 231
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

– The Show IO Block command displays the IO Terminal


Block dialog box, which shows information about the
selected IO block and its IO points. See IO Terminal Block
dialog box on page 239.
– The Properties command displays the Properties dialog box
for the selected IO card. This feature is intended only for
Kongsberg Maritime personnel.
• For a serial port:

– The Properties command displays the Properties-DpPs


Serial Port dialog box for the selected serial port. See
Properties — DpPs Serial port on page 247.

Displays the IO Terminal Block dialog box, which shows


information about the selected IO block and its IO points. See
IO Terminal Block dialog box on page 239.

IO Manager dialog box


The IO Manager dialog box displays an overview of the IO system, showing the IO
drivers and IO blocks for a selected station.
To display the dialog box, either:
1 Select System→Equipment.
The Equipment - System Status dialog box is displayed.
2 Right-click on a PS line anywhere on the PS or PS Redundancy page of the
Equipment - System Status dialog box.
The following shortcut menu is displayed:

3 Select IO Manager.
The IO Manager dialog box is displayed.

232 385575/D
System status monitoring

or:
1 Start the Station Explorer (see Station Explorer dialog box on page 230).
2 Select the required PS from the drop-down list.

3 Click on the IO Manager icon ( ).


The IO Manager dialog box has three pages, which give an overview of the IO Interface
system:
• The IO Configurator page, in expandable tree view, presents the IO drivers and IO
blocks for the selected PS.
• The IO Statistics page gives an overview of the connected terminals and modules.
This feature is intended only for Kongsberg Maritime personnel.
• The IO Library page presents the contents of the IO typical library. This feature is
intended only for Kongsberg Maritime personnel.

IO Configurator page
In the IO Manager dialog box — IO Configurator page, use the drop-down box to select
the PS for which you will display the IO drivers and IO blocks.

385575/D 233
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

All IO blocks and devices


In the expandable tree view, the symbols are as follows:

1st level, lists the IO driver types ( )

2nd level, lists the IO drivers ( )


3rd level, lists the IO blocks in alphabetic order ( )
If you click on an IO driver name, the corresponding Driver Properties dialog
box is displayed.
If you click on an IO block name, the corresponding IO Terminal Block dialog box
is displayed. See IO Terminal Block dialog box on page 239.

234 385575/D
System status monitoring

RBUS IO Image
The RBUS IO Image provides a graphical view of the status of the RBUS IO cards. This
is intended as an aid to fault-finding in the IO system.
To display the RBUS IO Image:
1 Start the Station Explorer (see Station Explorer dialog box on page 230).
2 Select the required PS from the drop-down list.
3 Expand the IO Manager to locate the RBUSDriver.
4 Click on the sub-menu symbol ( ) and select the Show RBUS IO Image command
from the sub-menu.
The RBUS IO Image can be displayed either in the Overview level or the Detailed level:
• When the Overview level is selected, the display corresponds to the physical layout of
the IO cards as you see them in the IO cabinet.
• When the Detailed level is selected, more detailed card and rack information is
displayed. The Detailed level is intended primarily for Kongsberg Maritime personnel.

Overview level
Example RBUS IO Images at the Overview level for an RCU-based PS is shown below.

385575/D 235
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

The alarm status indicators are the same as for the Station Explorer. See Station Explorer
dialog box on page 230.
If you click on an IO card, the IO Terminal Block dialog box is displayed showing
information about the selected IO card and its IO channels. See IO Terminal Block
dialog box on page 239.
If you right-click on an IO card, a shortcut menu is displayed:

236 385575/D
System status monitoring

• The Show IO Block command displays the IO Terminal Block dialog box, showing
information about the selected IO card and its IO channels. See IO Terminal Block
dialog box on page 239.
• If the IO card has an error condition, you can select the System Events for Node
or System Events for Node and Subnodes command to display the Event List view
containing the relevant alarms.
The tool bar of the RBUS IO Image window provides the following functions:
Displays the Overview level of the RBUS IO Image.

Displays the Detailed level of the RBUS IO Image.

Shows “out-of-rack” cards. Not relevant during normal


operation.
Use this drop-down list box to select any other PS to be displayed.

Appears when an IO card is clicked.


Hides/shows the IO Terminal Block dialog box for the selected
IO card.

Detailed level
Example RBUS IO Image at Detailed level for an RCU-based PS is shown below.

385575/D 237
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Rack positions containing PSs and power supply units are not shown on the Detailed
level.
The information provided on the Detailed level is intended primarily for Kongsberg
Maritime personnel.

238 385575/D
System status monitoring

IO Terminal Block dialog box


The IO Terminal Block dialog box displays information about a selected IO block and its
IO points. This is intended as an aid to fault finding in the IO system.
To display this dialog box, either:
1 Start the Station Explorer.
2 Select the required PS from the drop-down list.
3 Expand the appropriate driver to locate the required IO block.

4 Either click on the block icon ( ), or click on the sub-menu symbol ( ) and
select the Show IO Block command from the sub-menu.
or:
1 Start the IO Manager.
2 On the IO Configurator page, select the required PS from the drop-down list.
3 Expand the appropriate driver to locate the required IO block.
4 Click on the IO block name.
The content of this dialog box varies according to the IO driver.
Note
For IO cards belonging to the RBUS driver, a block is the same as an IO card, and a
point is the same as an IO channel.

385575/D 239
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Station Explorer
The upper-left area displays the selected IO block, filtered from the expandable
tree structure of the Station Explorer, and displays the driver, alarm status and the
block tag of the selected IO block. For more details, see Station Explorer dialog
box on page 230.
Tag
Displays the name of the selected IO block.
Description
Displays descriptive text for the selected IO block.
Task
Shows the scan rate for the selected IO block:
• Task 1 — Normal
• Task 2 — Quick

240 385575/D
System status monitoring

• Task 3 — Rapid
Auto
Not relevant for K-Pos DP systems.
Upper-right list box
The upper-right list box displays the IO block properties represented by parameters
and values. When you point at a parameter, a tool-tip is displayed, providing
more explanatory text.
IO Points
This area displays information about the IO points for the selected IO block.
Direction
The direction of the data flow:
• Output data flow
• Input data flow
IO tag
The name of the IO signal.
(IO point parameter symbol)

Clicking this symbol displays the IO Point Parameters section in the lower
part of the dialog box.
Status
The status of the sensor value:
• OK
• Error
• SIM
Sensor value
The sensor value and its units.
(signal conditioning elements)
Symbols representing the signal conditioning elements used, in order of
execution.
Note
When the cursor is positioned over one of the bitmaps representing an IO signal
conditioning element, the name and parameters of the element are displayed in
a tool-tip window.

Eng. value
The engineering value and its units.
(Eng. status)
The status of the engineering value:
• OK

385575/D 241
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

• Error
• SIM
Connection
For signals that are to be transferred between process stations, this field displays
the name of the NetIO tag that corresponds to this IO point.
Note
If you click a cell in the Connection column, the Connect/Disconnect Terminal dialog
box is displayed for the selected IO point. This dialog box has no function during
normal operation.

Details
Clicking the Details button displays or removes the IO Point Parameters and Eng.
Signal Conditioning sections in the lower part of the dialog box.

Shortcut menu
If you right-click on any displayed IO point tag, the following shortcut menu is displayed:

Only one of the commands in the shortcut menu is available for the operator.
Resize Columns
Resizes the columns displayed in the IO Points area to fit the content of the columns.

Signal Conditioning elements


Signal conditioning elements are used in the IO points of an IO block to parameterize
the input/output process signals and to scale the signals.
All signal conditioning elements are bidirectional, and may be used both on input and
output signals, but some elements are meaningful on input signals only.
The symbols are displayed between the Sensor value and Eng. value columns in the
IO Points area.

242 385575/D
System status monitoring

The signal conditioning includes elements for:


• Scaling
• Inversion
• Filtering
• Fail-safe value
• Compensation for wire resistance.
The available signal conditioning elements are as follows:
Icon Element name Analogue Digital Input Ouput Description
Scale X X X Sensor scale maximum
Sensor scale minimum
Sensor unit
Engineering scale maximum
Engineering scale minimum
Engineering unit
Multi Scale X X X Number of points
(For each point) Sensor point
(For each point) Engineering point
Sensor unit
Engineering unit
PT 100 X X Wire resistance
Sensor unit
Engineering unit
Engineering unit X X X Engineering scale maximum
Engineering scale minimum
Engineering unit
Fail-safe X X Fail-safe value
Freeze (check box):
Checked: Last usable value
Not checked: Fail-safe value

Filter X X Filter time (seconds)

Limit check X X X Gain


Bias
Use negative input value
Invert X X X None
Fail-safe X X Fail-safe value
Freeze (check box):
Checked: Last usable value
Not checked: Fail-safe value
Filter X X On delay (seconds)
Off delay (seconds)

385575/D 243
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

IO Point Browser dialog box


The IO Point Browser allows you to search for IO points for a selected PS, and to display
information about them. This is intended as an aid to fault-finding in the IO system.
To display the IO Point Browser dialog box:
1 Select System→Equipment.
The Equipment - System Status dialog box is displayed.
2 Right-click on a PS line anywhere on the PS or PS Redundancy page of the
Equipment - System Status dialog box.
The following shortcut menu is displayed:

3 Select IO Point Browser.


The IO Point Browser dialog box is displayed.

244 385575/D
System status monitoring

Station
Use this drop-down list box to select either all PSs, or the PS within which you
want to browse.
Tag
Browse Criteria
Use this text box to enter the browse criteria. Wildcard characters can be used.
Match case
Use this check box to make the Browse Criteria case sensitive.
Match whole tag
Use this check box if the Browse Criteria text is the entire name of the required
IO point.
Match initial tag segment
Use this check box if the Browse Criteria text is the beginning of the name of
the required IO points.

385575/D 245
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

IO Status
Use these check boxes to restrict the search to IO points which have the specified
status:
• IO OK
• IO Manual
• IO Passive
• IO Error
• IO FailSafe
• IO Error Override
Browse by IO Tag
Use this command button to search for IO points whose name satisfies the specified
Browse Criteria.
Browse by Module Tag
Not relevant for K-Pos DP systems.
Details
Clicking the Details button displays or removes the IO Point Parameters and Eng.
Signal Conditioning sections in the lower part of the dialog box.
Browse results
The upper-left area displays information about the IO points that satisfy the search
criteria. This is the same information as displayed on the IO Terminal Block dialog
(see IO Terminal Block dialog box on page 239), with one additional column:
• PS — The name of the PS that contains the IO point.
If you right-click on any IO point tag displayed in the browser window, the following
shortcut menu is displayed:

246 385575/D
System status monitoring

Only some of the commands in the shortcut menu are available for the operator.
Add Trend to previous popup
Adds a new trend to already created popup.
Create Trend in popup
Starts the procedure for creating a trend for the selected IO point.
Resize Columns
Resizes the columns displayed in the IO Point Browser dialog box to fit the content
of the columns.
Show IO Block
Allows you to view configuration information for the selected IO Block by
displaying the corresponding IO Terminal Block dialog box. See IO Terminal Block
dialog box on page 239.

Properties — DpPs Serial port


The Properties — DpPs Serial port dialog box shows the properties and configuration
of a selected serial port.
To display the Properties — DpPs Serial port dialog box:
1 Start the Station Explorer (see Station Explorer dialog box on page 230).
2 Select the required PS from the drop-down list.
3 Expand IO Manager, ComAs and the required serial line to locate the required serial
port (in the example below Serial port 101).

4 Click on the sub menu icon ( ).

385575/D 247
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

• A shortcut menu is displayed.


5 Select Properties on this shortcut menu.
• The Properties — DpPs Serial port dialog box is displayed.
The information provided on the Properties — DpPs Serial port dialog box is intended
primarily for Kongsberg Maritime personnel.

SerPort page

Enable configuration
When selected, the configuration shown is enabled.
Baud rate
Shows the baud rate (110, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 baud).
Parity
Shows the parity (No, Even, Odd).
Number of data bits
Shows the number of data bits (5, 6, 7, 8 bit).
Number of stop bits
Shows the number of stop bits (1, 2 bit).
Protocol
Protocols available; Ecma24, Kos100, End of File, End of Record, Raw, Xon/Xoff,
Siemens 3946L, 3946H, 3946RL, 3946RH, Measurex, UniTelWay, SMC, Polled
raw, End of Record/Raw, Kos 150, Inter Frame Gap, Time sync.

248 385575/D
System status monitoring

EOR char. input


Shows the End of Record character input in hexadecimal.
EOR char. output
Shows the End of Record character output in hexadecimal.
HW handshake
Shows the Hardware handshake (No, RTS@Send, RTS@Receive) - (RTS is short
for Request To Send).
HW selection
Shows the Hardware selection (Default, RS232, RS422, RS485).
Auto disable interrupts
To automatically disable interrupts, select this check box and click the OK or
Apply button.
Max. interrupt rate receive
Shows the highest recorded receive interrupt rate for this serial port (since startup
or reset).
Max. interrupt rate exception
Shows the highest recorded exception interrupt rate for this serial port (since
startup or reset).

Disable status page

The Disable status page of the Properties — DpPs Serial port dialog for the ComAs driver
displays the interrupt status of a selected serial port.

385575/D 249
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Reset disabled serial port


To reset a disabled serial port, select this check box and click the OK or Apply
button.
Reset max. interrupt rate
To reset the displayed values for Max. receive interrupt rate and Max. exception
interrupt rate, select this check box and click the OK or Apply button.
Disabled due to high receive rate
Indicates whether the selected port is disabled due to high receive rate (0 =
enabled, 1 = disabled).
Disabled due to high exception rate
Indicates whether the selected port is disabled due to high exception rate (0 =
enabled, 1 = disabled).
Receive interrupt rate
Shows the current receive interrupt rate for this serial port.
Exception interrupt rate
Shows the current exception interrupt rate for this serial port.
Max. receive interrupt rate
Shows the highest recorded receive interrupt rate for this serial port (since startup
or reset).
Max. exception interrupt rate
Shows the highest recorded exception interrupt rate for this serial port (since
startup or reset).

Resetting a disabled serial line


A serial port may be automatically disabled by the system to protect the K-Pos DP
controller computer system from high traffic caused by an excessively high number
of interrupts.
If an automatic disable of interrupt has been performed when reading serial line data
from, for example, a position-reference system, a timeout alarm is issued. The message
includes the relevant driver tag.
This section describes how to manually reset a disabled serial line so that the process
station can continue reading input on that serial line. This procedure can be performed
without restarting the controller computer.
1 In the Dynamic Alarm Page of the Event List view, right-click the relevant message.
• A shortcut menu is displayed.
2 Select Station Explorer on this shortcut menu.
• The Station Explorer dialog box for the serial line that has an error is displayed.

250 385575/D
System status monitoring

3 Click the Driver Properties hotspot (the indicator to the right of 02_FanbeamDrv
in this example).
• The Driver Properties dialog box is displayed.

4 Click the Driver operation page tab.


• The Driver operation tabbed page is displayed.

385575/D 251
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

5 Select the Reset disabled serial port check box.


6 Click the OK button.
• The serial line is reset.
Note
Resetting a disabled serial line can also be performed by using the Properties — DpPs
Serial port dialog box. (See Properties — DpPs Serial port on page 247.)

252 385575/D
Built-in trainer

Built-in trainer

This section contains the following topics:


Trainer functions ............................................................................................................253
Using the trainer.............................................................................................................253
Setting the start position for the next session ................................................................255
Leaving the trainer .........................................................................................................255

Trainer functions
The built-in trainer provides functions for operator training based on a simulated system.
Simulations are performed at the system console with no additional equipment required.
In order to use an Operator Station for training, it must be connected to the MainSimulator
controller process station (PS) group (see Connect dialog box on page 102). When this
condition is met, the text SIMULATING (or other configuration-specific text) is displayed
flashing on the top bar after the name of the operator station in use.
If an Operator Station is not in command of a controller PS group, you can connect it
to any available group (such as MainSimulator) at any time. However, if the Operator
Station has command of a controller PS group, this system must be in Standby mode
before you can connect the Operator Station to a different group.
In DP systems with more than one Operator Station, the built-in trainer can be used at
one OS at the same time as the other OSs are used for normal DP operation, without
affecting the actual operation of the vessel. In this case the OSs are connected to different
controller PS groups. Before leaving an Operator Station after a training session, we
strongly recommend that you prepare the OS for DP operation by connecting it to the
Main controller PS or another relevant controller PS group.

Using the trainer


To use the trainer:
1 Ensure that the vessel is controlled from the bridge or from another OS. For systems
with only one OS, the system must be in Standby mode.
2 Select System→Connect.

385575/D 253
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

• The Connect dialog box is displayed.


3 Select MainSimulator on the Connect dialog box.
4 Click the OK or Apply button.
• The Operator Station is connected to the MainSimulator controller PS group.
• All other Operator Stations are still connected to the Main (or another relevant)
controller PS group(s).
• While the Operator Station is connected to the MainSimulator controller PS
group, the text SIMULATING (or other configuration-specific text) is displayed
flashing on the top bar.
5 Take command of MainSimulator at the Operator Station (see Command transfer
on page 95).
• The TAKE button status lamp on the operator panel is lit.
6 Select Tools →Trainer.
• The Trainer Settings dialog box is displayed.

• The values for Start Position, Wind Speed, etc. shown in this dialog box are the
values that were in use when the previous training session was stopped (provided
that no stop or restart of the OS has taken place in the meantime).
7 If required, enter the start position of the vessel from where you want to start the
simulation. You can select to move to this position whenever the system returns to
Standby mode by selecting the corresponding check box.
8 Enter the required Wind and Sea Current values to be used during the simulation.
9 Enter the vessel Draught to be used during the simulation.
10 Click the OK or Apply button.
• The system is now ready for simulation.
11 Use the system as you would during normal operation.

254 385575/D
Built-in trainer

Setting the start position for the next session


When the chart background display has been configured, you may use the planning
function in the Posplot view to find the start position you want to use for the next trainer
session. When the correct start position has been found, change to Standby mode, launch
the Trainer Settings dialog box, key in the coordinates and click the Move to this position
in Standby mode check box.

Leaving the trainer


Before leaving an Operator Station after a training session, we strongly recommend that
you prepare the OS for DP operation by connecting it to the Main or another relevant
controller PS group.
1 Go to Standby mode.
2 Select System →Connect.
• The Connect dialog box is displayed.
3 Select Main (or another relevant controller PS group).
4 Click the OK or Apply button.
• The Operator Station is connected to the Main (or another relevant) controller
PS group.
• The values for Start Position, Wind Speed, etc. entered in the Trainer Settings
dialog box are saved for use as start-up values in a future training session.

385575/D 255
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

DP online consequence
analysis

This section contains the following topics:


DP online consequence analysis ....................................................................................256
Selecting the DP class....................................................................................................257
Consequence analysis status messages ..........................................................................257
Consequence analysis alarm messages ..........................................................................258

DP online consequence analysis


The DP Online Consequence Analysis function performs analyses to determine the
vessel's ability to maintain its position and heading after predefined worst-case single
equipment failures. The analyses are called “online” because they consider the present
environmental conditions, thruster status and power consumption.
This function satisfies the requirements of IMO Equipment Class 2 and Class 3. It also
satisfies the requirements for systems with enhanced reliability (Class ER).
The analysis checks whether the thrusters remaining in operation after a worst-case
single failure are able to generate the same resultant thruster force and moment as
required before the failure, and whether the remaining generators are able to produce a
sufficient amount of power. An alarm message is issued if a failure would result in lack
of thrust or power, and subsequently drift-off.
The worst-case single failures that are simulated are predefined according to the power
and thruster configuration of the vessel. Typically, these failures will be the loss of one
complete switchboard, one engine room, or a group of thrusters that can be affected by a
single equipment failure.
Consequence analyses are performed cyclically, every minute, whenever the following
criteria are satisfied:
• The vessel is in Auto Position mode (consequence analysis can also be performed
in other modes, if configured).
• The position setpoint status displayed on the Dashboard is PRESENT (for Auto
Position mode).

256 385575/D
DP online consequence analysis

• The heading setpoint status on the Dashboard is PRESENT (for Auto Position mode).
• DP Class 2, Class 3 or Class ER is selected.
Note
By default, the DP Online Consequence Analysis function is switched off. Prior to
engaging Class 2, Class 3 or Class ER operations, the corresponding class of operation
must be selected using the DP Class dialog box.

Selecting the DP class


DP Class 2, Class 3 or Class ER must be selected on the Dp Class dialog box to activate
the DP Consequence Analysis.
To display this dialog box, select Settings (General)→Dp Class.

If configured, the currently selected DP Class is indicated on the dashboard.


When the consequence analysis is running, the time to the next sample is counting down
and shown in the box Time to next analysis.

Consequence analysis status messages


When the DP Online Consequence Analysis function is activated, an information
message is displayed, e.g.:
Consequence analysis running class 2
When the system mode is changed from automatic control, or if you explicitly turn off the
function using the DP Class dialog box, the following information message is displayed:

385575/D 257
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Consequence analysis stopped


During a change of position or heading, the failure simulations are temporarily halted.
When the vessel reaches PRESENT position and PRESENT heading, the failure
simulations are started again. No information messages are issued for this type of
temporary halt.

Consequence analysis alarm messages


If an analysis detects that a given worst-case single equipment failure will result in
insufficient thrust or power to maintain the vessel's position and heading, an alarm
message is displayed:
Consequence analysis drift off warning

This message is followed by additional information whose content depends on the type
of failure simulated and whether insufficient thrust or insufficient power was detected.
For example:
power critical if connect-swbd 1 lost
thrust critical if thrusters 1-4 lost
thrust critical if port diesel lost

If the message indicates that thrust is critical, you should enable more thrusters. If
the message indicates that power is critical, you should make more power available.
Alternatively, change to a more favourable heading.

258 385575/D
Display views

Display views

This section contains the following topics:


Diesel view.....................................................................................................................259
Joystick view..................................................................................................................261
LTW view ......................................................................................................................265
Numeric view.................................................................................................................270
Posplot view...................................................................................................................273
Power view.....................................................................................................................285
Power consumption view...............................................................................................291
Reference system main view .........................................................................................292
Reference system status view ........................................................................................301
Rotation center view ......................................................................................................303
Sensor view....................................................................................................................303
Thruster forces view ......................................................................................................307
Thruster main view ........................................................................................................309
Thruster view — tunnel thruster ....................................................................................314
Thruster view — azimuth thruster ................................................................................317
Thruster view — propeller/rudder .................................................................................320
Thruster setpoint feedback view ....................................................................................323
Trends view....................................................................................................................325

Diesel view
The Diesel view provides a simplified mimic display of the vessel's diesel engines and
fuel rack system as seen from the K-Pos DP system.
The information presented in this view is based on the following signals received by the
K-Pos DP system:
• The power produced by each main diesel generator
• The fuel rack reading
• Diesel clutched in or out
To select the display view: place the cursor in the upper left corner of the working
area so that the drop-down list becomes visible. Click on the arrow and select the view
from the list.

385575/D 259
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Main models for fuel-rack regulation in common use are:


• propeller with two diesels and two shaft generators
• propeller with one diesel, no shaft generator
• propeller with two diesels, no shaft generator
• propeller with one diesel, one shaft generator
The configuration shown in this example view consists of starboard and port propellers,
each driven by two diesel engines with fuel rack regulation system. Each diesel engine
also drives a generator. Each diesel engine is connected to the propeller via a clutch
and gearbox.
This is a generator symbol showing the produced power both as
a numerical value (above the symbol) and graphically (the line
in the symbol) as a percentage of the nominal power (where the
vertical axis is 100%). The symbol is colour-coded:
• Grey indicates that the generator is not running.
• Green indicates that the generator is OK and running.
• Yellow indicates that the generator has a warning status.
• Red indicates that the generator has a signal error on the load
signal.

260 385575/D
Display views

These are numerical and graphical displays of the fuel rack load
on the diesel engines. They have the same colour coding as
for the generators.

Clutch symbol with the same colour coding as for the generators.

These are numerical and graphical displays of propeller


pitch/rpm feedback. The green label indicates which system has
control of the thrusters.
The symbol is colour-coded:
• The colour of the bars changes to yellow when the thrusters
pass the limit for percentage of available thrust (typically
80%). This applies only in some modes (depending on your
system configuration, but usually in auto-modes).
• The colour of the bars changes to red when there is a signal
error from one of the propellers/rudders.

Joystick view
The Joystick view shows the thrust setpoint and response, and the vessel speed in the
various axes, to assist during positioning with the joystick alone.
To select the display view: place the cursor in the upper left corner of the working
area so that the drop-down list becomes visible. Click on the arrow and select the view
from the list.

385575/D 261
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Shows the axes that are under joystick control.


In the example view displayed, all three axes Yaw, Surge and
Sway are controlled by the joystick.

This is a graphical display of the obtained rotational moment,


the rotational moment setpoint is marked by the orange line.
The numerical value of the obtained rotational moment is
displayed.

262 385575/D
Display views

This is a graphical display of the obtained surge force, the surge


force setpoint is marked by the orange line.
The numerical value of the obtained surge force is displayed.

This is a graphical display of the obtained sway force, the sway


force setpoint is marked by the orange line.
The numerical value of the obtained sway force is displayed.

This is the estimated sway speed at the bow of the vessel. This
value is calculated from the vessel dimensions and the estimated
Rate Of Turn.

This is the estimated sway speed at the stern of the vessel.


This value is calculated from the vessel dimensions and the
estimated Rate Of Turn.

This is the estimated Rate Of Turn.

This shows the status of the speed estimates.


• OK — The system is receiving acceptable position and
heading information, and at least one speed sensor is In Use.
• Manual — Manual speed is In Use.
• Model — No speed sensor or Manual speed enabled, but at
least one position-reference system is accepted.
• Dropout — No speed sensors or position-reference systems
enabled (text on pink background).

385575/D 263
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

This is the estimated surge and sway speed at the vessel's


Midships position.

The resulting force and speed vectors are shown graphically.


The numeric values show the range of the display for both force
and speed.

This shows the present joystick thrust setting as selected on


the Joystick Settings dialog box which can be either Full Thrust
or Reduced Thrust.
The present joystick precision setting as selected on the Joystick
Settings dialog box is shown. The joystick precision setting can
be either High Speed Precision, General Precision or Low Speed
Precision.

This shows the axes that are currently selected for environmental
compensation (see Joystick Settings dialog box on page 73).

264 385575/D
Display views

This shows the joystick demand as a percentage of the


maximum available demand in surge, sway and yaw axes.

If this operator station is not in command a grey symbol on


the graphic display to the right shows the setpoint of the local
joystick.

A graphic display of the joystick setpoint is shown. If this


Operator Station is not in command, the graphic display shows
both the setpoint from this Operator Station (Local) and the
setpoint from the operator Station that is in command.
This information can be used to ensure a bumpless transfer
when you move the command from one OS to another.
This information can also be used for checking that the joystick
is functioning. Consider whether the joystick is functioning by
comparing the displayed joystick setpoint to the actual joystick
deflection (surge and sway) and the degree of rotation (yaw).

LTW view
The Light-weight Taut Wire (LTW) is based on measurements and calculations of the
vessel's position relative to a fixed point on the sea bed.
A gimbal head on a boom over the side of the vessel is connected by a wire to a depressor
weight on the sea bed.
The vertical component of the wire length is measured when the depressor is lowered
onto the sea bed. The angles between the wire and the vertical, both in the alongships
and the athwarthships axes (see Figure 31), are measured as the vessel moves away from
the point where the depressor weight was deployed.
The position is calculated based on this data. The actual length of the wire is also
calculated and presented in the LTW view. Corrections are applied to allow for the offset
distance between the sensor on the gimbal head and the vessel's rotation center.

385575/D 265
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Figure 31 LTW position-reference system

Gimbal head

Wire Draught Wire angle


angle alongships
athwarthships

Wire
Wire Wire length, Water length, Wire
length vertical depth vertical length
component component

Depressor Seabed
Depressor
weight Seabed weight
CD2824

The draught is measured, and the vertical component of the wire length is recalculated
whenever the draught changes. Changes of water depth due to turning of the tide are not
taken into account. In these circumstances the depressor weight must be lifted off the sea
bed and re-lowered to have the system record the change of wire length.
The LTW view allows you to monitor the performance of a Light-weight Taut Wire
(LTW) position-reference system.
The position of the depressor weight is shown relative to the position of the gimbal head
(the center of the graphic display). The maximum operational area is also shown.
To select the display view: place the cursor in the upper left corner of the working
area so that the drop-down list becomes visible. Click on the arrow and select the view
from the list.

266 385575/D
Display views

These are the gimbal head alongship and athwartship axes. The
intersection of the axes represents the gimbal head position and
is always at the center of the display.

The symbol represents the position of the depressor weight


relative to the gimbal head.

385575/D 267
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

This shows the maximum operational area.

These are the display range value, decrease/increase buttons


and grid spacing value. The range is the distance from center
to edge of plot. The button decreases the display range.
The button increases the display range.
You can adjust the grid spacing using the view control dialog box
(see Light Taut Wire Plot view control on page 269). The grid
spacing is automatically adjusted when decreasing/increasing
the display range.

This shows the status of the “Mooring On” signal from the
LTW system. This signal indicates when the depressor weight
is on the sea bed.

This shows the angle of the taut wire in the alongship and
athwartships directions as measured at the gimbal head.
The Along angle is positive when the gimbal head is forward
of the depressor weight.
The Athwart angle is positive when the gimbal head is to
starboard of the depressor weight.

268 385575/D
Display views

This shows the position of the depressor weight relative to the


gimbal head.
The Along position is positive when the depressor weight is
forward of the gimbal head.
The Athwart position is positive when the depressor weight is to
starboard of the gimbal head.

This shows the wire length.


Total is the wire length measured by the gimbal head.
Vertical is the depth of the depressor weight relative to the
gimbal head, measured by the wire length when the depressor
weight was lowered onto the sea bed.

Light Taut Wire Plot view control


To display the view control dialog box: right-click on the view →View control.

Grid
Show
To show or hide the grid.
Square
Square grid.

385575/D 269
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Circular
Circular grid.
Spacing
The spacing (distance) between grid lines or circles. You can change the grid
spacing by clicking the down arrow and selecting a new value from the drop-down
list.
The grid spacing is automatically adjusted when decreasing/increasing the display
range.
Light Taut Wire Graphics
LTW 1, LTW 2, LTW 3, LTW 4
Allows you to select the LTW system whose position information is to be displayed
in the main graphic area of the view.
Range
Allows you to specify the display range explicitly by typing in a value in the text
box.
Incr. Range
This button allows you to increase the display range in fixed steps.
Decr. Range
This button allows you to decrease the display range in fixed steps.

Numeric view
The Numeric view shows performance data in numerical form.
To select the display view: place the cursor in the upper left corner of the working
area so that the drop-down list becomes visible. Click on the arrow and select the view
from the list.

270 385575/D
Display views

The position setpoint, present position and position deviation in


north (N) and east (E) direction are shown.

385575/D 271
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

These are the values for heading setpoint, present heading and heading
deviation.

These are the values for Rate Of Turn setpoint and present Rate Of Turn.

These are the values for vessel speed setpoint and present speed.

This is the direction of the vessel speed relative to true (N UP) or to the
vessel (H REL). The displayed orientation is selected from the Heading
pane on the dashboard.

This displays the warning and alarm limits for position and
heading deviation. Green indicates that the limits are currently
active.

The calculated residual force (the sum of all the non-modelled


forces together with any errors in the modelling). The residual
force is shown with either true components (N and E) or relative
components (Surge and Sway), as selected from the Heading
pane on the dashboard. Moment is the rotation moment exerted
on the vessel.

272 385575/D
Display views

Posplot view
The Posplot view shows the vessel's position relative to the position and heading
setpoints and to other displayed objects, such as the position of transponders. The
prevailing wind and current are also displayed.
Using the Posplot view control dialog box, you can:
• Select either a true or a relative display, with either the position setpoint or the present
vessel position at the centre of the display.
• Display or remove various features on the view.
• Show or hide a chart on the Posplot view.
• Show or hide the grid, and select grid type and grid spacing.
Note
Grid display is only possible when the range is 10 000 m or less. When the range is
larger than 10 000 m, the grid disappears automatically. Maximum range is 3 000 km.

• Specify the display range, i.e. distance from centre to edge of plot.
• Display or hide a trace line and trend symbols, and also specify the sample rate and
the extent of the trace line/trend symbols.
The EBL (Electronic Bearing Line) button can be used for measuring positions, distances
and bearings on the display.
To select the display view: place the cursor in the upper left corner of the working
area so that the drop-down list becomes visible. Click on the arrow and select the view
from the list.

385575/D 273
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

The example Posplot view shows some of the available display features. The figures
with text that follow the example describe all the standard features of the Posplot view.
Additional features which relate to specific operational modes are described together
with the appropriate operating procedure.
The compass rose is marked with degrees. The north/south and
east/west geographical axes are displayed.

274 385575/D
Display views

This is the vessel symbol that indicates the position of the vessel, relative to
known reference points and directions. The vessel's Midships position is
marked with a small cross. The currently-selected rotation centre is marked
with a small circle. The size of the vessel symbol is dynamically scaled
according to the selected display range. This vessel symbol is exchanged by
an unscaled symbol at small and large range values.
Note
When changing the Posplot view to close range or long range, the vessel
symbol changes from showing the correct form and dimensions of the vessel
into a simplified shape with a constant size.

This is the position setpoint symbol. By selecting and moving this symbol
you can change the position setpoint (see Marking a new position setpoint
on the Posplot view on page 166).

The position carrot that regulates smooth vessel movement is displayed


as a small asterisk. When the position setpoint is changed, the position
carrot moves towards the new setpoint. The speed of the carrot's movement
depends on the speed setpoint.

When relaxed controller mode is in use (selected from the Gain dialog box),
the radius for relaxed control is shown as a shaded area with the position
setpoint as center. The area around this circle is click-sensitive. You can
easily adjust the relaxed control radius by clicking in this area to open the
Gain dialog box to set a new value. If you select to hide the setpoint from
the Show page on the Posplot view control dialog box, the shaded area
indicating the relaxed control radius will also be hidden.

385575/D 275
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

When Green controller mode is in use (selected from the Gain dialog box),
the outer and inner control radii are indicated on the Posplot view, with
the position setpoint as centre. The inner radius is indicated by a blue,
shaded circle. The predicted trajectory for the vessel is displayed as a line
pointing from the rotation centre.

This is the heading setpoint symbol. By selecting and moving this symbol
you can change the heading setpoint (see Marking a new position setpoint
on the Posplot view on page 166).

This is the present heading symbol.

The heading carrot that regulates smooth vessel movement is displayed


as a small pointer. When the heading setpoint is changed, the heading
carrot moves towards the new setpoint. The speed of the carrot's movement
depends on the Rate Of Turn setpoint.

This displays range value and decrease/increase buttons. The


Range value is the distance from centre to edge of plot. The
button decreases the displayed range. The button increases
the displayed range.
The N symbol indicates the orientation of the heading as
selected by the buttons on the heading pane — if H REL
(heading relative) is selected the symbol is tilted in the
respective direction.
The Grid value is the spacing between grid lines or
circles. The grid spacing is automatically adjusted when
decreasing/increasing the display range.
The TM/RM toggle button (true/relative motion) changes the
orientation of the display (the same function as the Motion page
on the Posplot view control).

276 385575/D
Display views

The EBL (Electronic Bearing Line) button. This feature allows


you to view the coordinates of positions on the display.

This shows the wind arrow. The arrow rotates around


the compass rose to show the true wind direction (filtered
measurement from the wind sensor). An arrow pointing
towards the plot indicates “comes from” direction, and an arrow
pointing outwards from the plot indicates “goes to” direction.
The direction of the arrow depends on the units setting for wind
direction as selected using the Presentation Units dialog box.

This is the true wind speed and direction (filtered measurements


from the wind sensor).
An “s” in front of the “degrees” symbol in the unit for wind
direction means “setting” (goes to) . This is selected using
the Presentation Units dialog box.

This shows the residual as current.


The arrow rotates around the compass rose to show the
direction. An arrow pointing toward the plot indicates “comes
from” direction, and an arrow pointing outwards from the
plot indicates “goes to” direction. The direction of the arrow
depends on the units setting for sea current direction as selected
using the Presentation Units dialog box (see Wind, waves and
sea current direction on page 61).

In DP operations this is the residual shown as current speed


and true direction.
An “s” in front of the “degrees” symbol in the unit for direction
means “setting” (goes to) if selected using the Presentation
Units dialog box (see Wind, waves and sea current direction
on page 61).

385575/D 277
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

These are position warning and alarm limit circles (centred


on the position setpoint). With automatic surge and sway
control, and with position limits enabled, these circles indicate
the warning and alarm limits for position deviation. When
the vessel reference point crosses the warning limit circle, a
warning is given. When the vessel reference point crosses the
alarm limit circle, an alarm is given.
The position warning and alarm limit circles are hidden when
the setpoint is hidden (see Show page on page 280).

The short lines, dashed and solid, are heading warning and
alarm limit markers (centred on the heading setpoint). With
automatic yaw control, and with heading limits enabled, these
markers indicate the warning and alarm limits for heading
deviation. When the vessel heading crosses the warning limit, a
warning is given. When the vessel heading crosses the alarm
limit, an alarm is given.
The heading warning and alarm limit markers are hidden when
the setpoint is hidden (see Show page on page 280).

This shows a transponder symbol for a position-reference


system.
A circle around a transponder symbol indicates that this
transponder is the Reference Origin. An empty circle indicates
that the Reference Origin transponder has been deselected.

Posplot view — riser disconnect limit


When watch circle limits and riser disconnect limit are enabled using the Riser
disconnect settings dialog box, the limits are displayed on the Posplot view

278 385575/D
Display views

WCC Watch circle centre.


Dashed circles Watch circle limits — warning and alarm.
Solid circles Riser disconnect limit.

385575/D 279
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Posplot view control


To display the view control dialog box: right-click on the view →View control.

Motion page

Plot Centerpoint
True Motion
True display centred on the position setpoint. The position setpoint (required
position) is placed at the centre of the display.
Relative Motion
Relative display centred on the current position. The symbol of the vessel (present
position) is placed at the centre of the display.

Show page

Show/Hide
Display or remove various features of the Posplot view. The choice of features
available is configured for each vessel.

280 385575/D
Display views

The Setpoint, Carrot, Refsys and Wind/Current features are described previously in
this section.
Selecting Green Prediction displays the predicted trajectory for the vessel as a
line pointing from the rotation centre.

Grid page

Show
Show or hide the grid.
Spacing
The spacing (distance) between grid lines or circles. The grid spacing can be
changed by clicking the down arrow and selecting a new value from the drop-down
list.
The grid spacing is automatically adjusted when decreasing/increasing the display
range.
Type
The type of grid.
Use UTM
UTM grid can be selected. The grid on the Posplot view is rotated with an angle
that corresponds with the Meridian convergence displayed.

385575/D 281
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Range page

Distance from Center ...to Edge of Plot


Allows you to specify the display range explicitly by typing a value in the text box.
Increase Range
This button allows you to increase the display range in fixed steps.
Decrease Range
This button allows you to decrease the display range in fixed steps.

Trace page

Vessel Position/Heading History


Trace-line
It is possible to show or hide a trace line of the vessel movements (Show) and
specify the sample rate (Sampling) and the extent of the trace (Memory) to be
stored. The trace line shows the path followed by the currently-selected vessel
rotation centre.

282 385575/D
Display views

Figure 32 Posplot trace line (example)

Trend-symbols
It is possible to show or hide a series of vessel symbols indicating vessel movement
and position (Show) and specify the sample rate (Sampling) and extent of the trend
symbols (Memory) to be stored.

Figure 33 Posplot trend symbols (example)

Note
With the Posplot view at close range when the simplified symbol is displayed,
the “trended” symbols are not shown.

Clear All
Clicking this button permanently clears all the trend symbols and the trace line
both in memory and on the Posplot view.

385575/D 283
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

EBL dialog box


The EBL (Electronic Bearing Line) function allows you to view the geographic
coordinates of any position on the Posplot view, the distance of this position from the
present position of the vessel, and both the true and relative bearings to the position
from the present position of the vessel.
1 Click the EBL button on the Posplot view.
• The EBL dialog box is displayed.
2 Move the trackball.
• A dotted line is displayed from the present vessel position to the position
indicated with the trackball.
• The coordinates, range, and true and relative bearings of the indicated position
are displayed on the EBL dialog box.
3 Click again to fix the indicated position.
• The EBL dialog box is continuously updated with the relative range and bearing
from the vessel to the indicated position.

Panning function
You can easily change the coordinates for the centre of the Posplot view using the
panning function. The position of the cursor in the Posplot view when activating the
function will then be moved to the centre of the view. This can be especially useful, for
example, when plotting waypoints for a new track using the Waypoint dialog box (see
separate Auto Track Mode Operator Manual).
The panning function is available from the shortcut menu. The panning related
commands on the shortcut menu will change depending on whether or not panning
has been selected.

284 385575/D
Display views

To use the panning function:


1 Place the cursor on the Posplot view at the new position around which the view is
to be centred.
2 Click the right trackball button.
• The Posplot shortcut menu is displayed (see the menu on the left side).
3 Select Center Here.
• The selected position now becomes the new centre of the Posplot view and the
text Panning ON is shown in the upper right corner of the view.

When the panning function is on, the following commands related to panning are
available on the shortcut menu.
Center Reset
Resets the centre of the view to the original position, i.e. the vessel position or
position setpoint, depending on the centre point selected on the Mode page of the
Posplot view control dialog box. It also switches the panning function off.
Center Here
Selects a new position for the centre of the Posplot view.
The panning function is automatically switched off if the rotation centre is changed
or another centre point is selected on the Mode page of the Posplot view control
dialog box.
The panning function may be automatically switched on in Mixed Joystick mode,
dependent on the configuration of your vessel. If required, it can be switched off
again by selecting Center Reset.

Power view
The Power view is a simplified mimic display of the vessel's electrical power system as
seen from the K-Pos DP system.
Normally the K-Pos DP system is supplied with information about:
• The power produced by each main generator.
• Which switchboard each generator is connected to.

385575/D 285
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

• How the switchboards are connected.


• How the thrusters are connected to the switchboards.
The thruster power consumption is either measured directly or calculated from the
thruster feedback.
To select the display view: place the cursor in the upper left corner of the working
area so that the drop-down list becomes visible. Click on the arrow and select the view
from the list.

This is a generator symbol showing the produced power both as a numerical


value (above the symbol) and graphically (the line in the symbol) as a
percentage of the nominal power (where the vertical axis is 100%). The
symbol is colour-coded:
• Grey indicates that the generator is not running.
• Green indicates that the generator is OK and running.
• Yellow indicates that the generator has a warning status.
• Red indicates that the generator has a signal error on the load signal.

286 385575/D
Display views

This is the switchboard name (swbdB in the example). The number in


brackets (2 in the example) indicates the connect-switchboard that the
switchboard is a part of. The symbol is colour-coded:
• Grey background indicates that no generators are connected to this
switchboard.
• Green background indicates that the switchboard is OK and running.
• Yellow background indicates that the switchboard has reached the
warning limit.
• Red background indicates that the switchboard has a signal error on
the load signal.

The position of the generator breaker symbol shows whether the generator
is connected to the switchboard or not. In addition, the generator breaker
symbol is colour-coded:
• Green frame indicates the breaker is closed.
• Grey frame indicates the breaker is open.
• Red frame indicates alarm status.
• Orange frames indicate the selected bus-ties for even distributed load
with zero current flow.

This is a thruster symbol showing the produced power both as a numerical


value and graphically as a percentage of the nominal power (where the
vertical axis is 100%). The symbol is colour-coded:
• Grey indicates that the thruster is not running.
• Green indicates that the thruster is OK and running.
• Yellow indicates that the thruster has reached the warning limit for load.
• Red indicates that the thruster has a signal error on the load signal, or
the demand to this thruster is reduced by the blackout prevention and it
is not possible to distribute this demand to other thrusters, i.e. the DP
system has insufficient thrust.

385575/D 287
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

The total available and consumed power from the generators


connected to each connect-switchboard or switchboard can be
displayed using the Power Plot view control dialog box. The
Load/MAX values indicate: the consumed power — the first
value (27 or 22 in the examples) and the maximum load — the
second value (95 in the examples) shown in percentage. If the
value for maximum load is in orange colour, this indicates that
the respective connect-switchboard is selected for Reduced
swbd load (see Power Optimal Allocation dialog box on
page 192).

288 385575/D
Display views

The power optimal allocation can be defined to run in different


modes as selected on the Power Optimal Allocation dialog box
(see Power Optimal Allocation dialog box on page 192).
In Normal mode the power optimal allocation will first of all
allocate thrust within the given power limitations.
• In Even Load mode the thrust is allocated so that the load is
as even and as low as possible on all connect-switchboards.
• In Even Load with zero bus-tie current flow mode the thrust
is allocated so that the current through the operator defined
bus-tie is as low as possible.
• In Reduced swbd load mode the operator can specify
wanted maximum power consumption on one or more
connect-switchboards.

A trend plot is displayed. You can select the information to be displayed using the Power
Plot view control dialog box.

385575/D 289
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Power Plot view control


To display the view control dialog box: right-click on the view →View control.

Present
Selects whether to display information about Connect-switchboards or Switchboards.
Show/Hide
If configured, selects whether or not to display the internal names (IO Tags) of the
generator breakers, bus-ties and thruster switches.
Plot
The trend plot to be displayed.
Time span
The time span for the trend plot.
Range...
Clicking this button displays the Y-Axis Range dialog box which allows you to
select automatic scaling or to manually set the upper and lower limits for the
y-axis plot scale.

Auto
Selecting this option will set the Y-axis range automatically.
Manual
Allows you to set the Upper and Lower scale limits manually.

290 385575/D
Display views

Power consumption view


The Power Consumption view shows:
• The consumed power for each connect-switchboard in numerical and graphical form
as a percentage of available power.
• Which switchboards are included in each connect-switchboard.
• The available power for each connect-switchboard in numerical form.
The view is dynamically updated to always show the current switchboard topology.
To select the display view: place the cursor in the upper left corner of the working
area so that the drop-down list becomes visible. Click on the arrow and select the view
from the list.

385575/D 291
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

The consumed power for each connect-switchboard is shown


in graphical form as a percentage of available power for each
connect-switchboard.
The number of bar graphs shown will be automatically
adjusted to reflect the vessel's current connect-switchboard
configuration, i.e. when it changes due to bus-tie breakers being
opened/closed.
Each bar graph has a blue bar and two predefined power
consumption limits (one for warning and one for alarm) that are
shown as dashed horizontal line for warning limit and solid line
for alarm limit. If the lower (warning) limit (typically 60%) is
exceeded the colour of the bar becomes yellow. If the upper
(alarm) limit (typically 80%) is exceeded the colour of the bar
changes to red.

The consumed power for a switchboard group.

The maximum power for a switchboard group.

The switchboards that are included in each connect-switchboard


(Conn-swbd 1, Conn-swbd 2, etc.) are designated SwbdA,
SwbdB, etc.

Reference system main view


The Reference system main view shows the individual and resulting performance of the
position-reference systems that are currently enabled.
The general characteristics of position-reference systems are described in Position
information on page 128.
To select the display view: place the cursor in the upper left corner of the working
area so that the drop-down list becomes visible. Click on the arrow and select the view
from the list.

292 385575/D
Display views

These are the display range value, decrease/increase buttons


and grid spacing value. The range is the distance from centre to
edge of plot. The button decreases the display range. The
button increases the display range.
The N symbol indicates the orientation of the heading as
selected by the buttons on the heading pane — if H REL is
selected the symbol is tilted in the respective direction.
You can adjust the grid spacing using the view control,
Grid page. The grid spacing is automatically adjusted when
decreasing/increasing the display range.

385575/D 293
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

The centre of the plot is the present vessel position. Using the
Reference system main view control dialog box, Mode page, you
can select either a true or a relative display.
A colour-coded circle is displayed with a radius equal to the
minimum prediction error limit and centred on the present
vessel position.
A colour-coded circle is displayed with a radius equal to the
median test acceptance limit and centred on the median value.
When the Median test is inactive, the Median Test Limit field
will show OFF and the circle will not be displayed.

This shows a zoomed-in view of the centre of the plot.


For each position-reference system, the capital letter with no
circle around it represents the last raw position measurement
for this system.
For each position-reference system, the small inner circle with a
capital letter inside represents the filtered position measurement
for this system.
For each position-reference system, the outer circle (dashed)
represents the standard deviation for this system.

An error ellipse is displayed. There is a certain statistical


confidence (95%) that the vessel's position is within the region
that is encircled by this ellipse (The error region in this example
has the shape of a circle, but generally the region may have
an oval shape).

This indicates the legends used for plotting. Colour coding and
capital letters help to differentiate the various position-reference
systems.

294 385575/D
Display views

These are numerical values for the minimum prediction error


limit and the median test limit. The two circles to the left
indicate the colour coding used on the plot.
The Median Test field will show the text OFF when the Median
Test is set to Off on the Validation page of the Reference System
dialog box (see Validation page on page 141). The text OFF
will also be displayed when less than three position-reference
systems are operational.

By clicking on one of the reference system names in the


lower-left corner of the view, you can plot a one minute trace of
the raw-data position measurements for the selected system.
Each position sample is indicated with a “+” on the plot. The
name of the selected system is shown. Click the Clear button
to stop plotting and to remove the raw-data position samples
from the plot.

This shows the status for each reference system or transponder: either Calibrating,
Online, Relative, Offline or Lost. For reference systems in monitoring state, the status text
is shown with Mon as prefix. If the measurements are acceptable, Calibrating and Online
are displayed in green (if the last sample was received) or in orange (if the last sample
was not received). If a position-reference system has a transponder that is defined and
enabled as mobile, then Relative is displayed instead of Online, provided that the optional
Follow Target mode has been previously selected (i.e. at least once).
If the measurements are lost, Offline is displayed in red, however, if the measurements
are lost during calibration, Lost is displayed in red. When a reference system is turned
off, the weight of that system is set to zero, and Offline is displayed in red before the
system is removed from the Reference system main view.
The position-reference system that is providing the Reference Origin is marked with an
asterisk.
A unique capital letter and colour code is assigned to each reference system to make it
easier to differentiate the various systems on the plot.
Numerical values and horizontal bars show the weighting applied to the measurements
from each reference system during the last second. The sum of weights of reference
systems with Online status is always one (1.0). If no new update is received from

385575/D 295
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

a specific reference system during the previous second, the weight for this system
is set to zero (and Online shown in orange). The horizontal bar is not displayed for
position-reference systems that have an enabled mobile transponder, i.e. those with a
Relative status.
In the lower right corner of the Reference system main view, numerical data or a trend
plot is displayed. Using the Reference system main view control dialog box, Mode page,
you can select between various types of numerical data and trend plots:
Position

These are numerical values for the calibrated position (for each reference system) as used
by the system. The data are presented according to current presentation units/position
selection. Note that colour coding is used.
Transponder Coordinates

These are numerical values for the origin of the particular reference system, for example
the position of an HPR or LBL transponder or an Artemis Fix antenna. Note that colour
coding is used.

296 385575/D
Display views

Raw Position

These are numerical values of raw (uncompensated and untransformed) position


measurements (for each reference system) as received by the system. The type of
reference system determines how the position is displayed: either as Along/STBD,
North/East, Latitude/Longitude or as Range/Bearing position format. Note that colour
coding is used.
RefSys Raw Data STD DEV

These are trend plots. The type of trend plot is selected on the Mode page of the Reference
system main view control dialog box. Note that colour coding is used.
You can also select the Y-axis scale range (either auto or manual scaling) and the time
span.

385575/D 297
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Refsys view control


To display the view control dialog box: right-click on the view →View control.

Mode page

Position
Transponder Coordinates
Raw Position
Select the required set of numerical data to be displayed in the lower right corner
of the Reference system main view. These items are described in detail in the
previous section.
Trend Plot
Select a Trend Plot to be displayed in the lower right corner of the Reference
system main view. These items are described in detail in the previous section.
Plot
The type of trend plot to be displayed. You can select between the following
options: RefSys Bias E, RefSys Bias N, RefSys STD DEV, RefSys STD DEV AS,
RefSysWeight or – none –.
Time span
The time span for the trend plot.
Range...
Clicking this button displays the Y-Axis Range dialog box which allows you to
select automatic scaling or to manually set the upper and lower limits for the
y-axis plot scale.

298 385575/D
Display views

Auto
Selecting this option will set the Y-axis range automatically.
Manual
Allows you to set the Upper and Lower scale limits manually.

Grid page

Show
To show or hide the grid.
Spacing
The spacing (distance) between grid lines or circles. You can change the grid
spacing by clicking the down arrow and selecting a new value from the drop-down
list.
The grid spacing is automatically adjusted when decreasing/increasing the display
range.

385575/D 299
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Type
The type of grid.

Range page

Distance from Center ...to Edge of Plot


Allows you to specify the display range by typing a value in the text box.
Increase Range
Allows you to increase the display range in fixed steps.
Decrease Range
Allows you to decrease the display range in fixed steps.

300 385575/D
Display views

Reference system status view


The Reference system status view shows the status for each reference system or
transponder. The information displayed is similar to the reference system status
information in the Reference System Main view.
To select the display view: place the cursor in the upper left corner of the working
area so that the drop-down list becomes visible. Click on the arrow and select the view
from the list.

Position The values for the calibrated position (from the position-reference
systems) as used by the system.
Position setpoint The wanted position for the vessel.
Reference origin The name of the position-reference system providing the
sensor reference origin.
Reference name The names of the position-reference systems.
The name of the position-reference system that is providing the
reference origin is marked with an asterisk (*).

385575/D 301
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Status The operational status of the position-reference system, which


can be Calibrating, Online, Relative, Offline or Lost. If a
position-reference system is in a monitoring state (operating but
not providing position-reference data) the status text is displayed
with the prefix Mon, e.g. Mon Online.
Note
The Relative status indication is only shown if the optional Follow
Target mode is available.

If the measurements are acceptable, Calibrating or Online is


displayed in green (if the last sample was received) or in orange
(if the last sample was not received).
If a position-reference system has a transponder that is defined
and enabled as mobile, then Relative is displayed instead of
Online, provided that the optional Follow Target mode has been
selected.
If the measurements are lost, Offline is displayed in red. If the
measurements are lost during calibration, Lost is displayed in red.
When a position-reference system is turned off, the weight and
standard deviation is set to zero, and Offline is displayed in red
before the position-reference system is removed from the view.
Offset The position Offset during the last second is displayed as a bar
graph (portion of 10m) for each reference system.
Weight A blue horizontal bar that shows the weighting factor applied to
the measurements from the position-reference system during
the last second.
The sum of the weighting factors for all position-reference
systems with an Online status is always one (full bar).
If no new update is received from the position-reference system
during the previous second, the Weight for the system is set to
minimum (zero) and Online is shown in orange.
The blue horizontal bar is not displayed for position-reference
systems that have an enabled mobile transponder, i.e. those with
a Relative status.

302 385575/D
Display views

Rotation center view


The Rotation Center view shows the position of all the rotation centres that are available
when the vessel is under automatic control. The coordinates are relative to the Midships
rotation centre.
To select the display view: place the cursor in the upper left corner of the working
area so that the drop-down list becomes visible. Click on the arrow and select the view
from the list.

The position of the currently-active rotation centre (In Use) is shown in orange colour.
The position of the proposed rotation centre (Selected) is shown in blue colour.

Sensor view
The Sensor view shows the performance and state of each of the vessel's sensors. This
view may have several pages depending on the number and type of sensors installed
on the vessel.

385575/D 303
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

To select the display view: place the cursor in the upper left corner of the working
area so that the drop-down list becomes visible. Click on the arrow and select the view
from the list.
By clicking on the left or right arrow (if present) you can display the next or previous
sensor view.
Examples of page 1 and 2 of the Sensor view:

304 385575/D
Display views

385575/D 305
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Common for all types of sensors on any of the Sensor view pages:
Sensor status indications:
The sensor is in use.

The sensor is enabled but not in use.

The sensor is not enabled.

There is an active warning alarm for this sensor.

The readings from the sensor are not OK.


- - - - - - Dashes replace the measurement values.

Additional sensor information:

If there is a symbol by the sensor name, clicking it will open a sensor description
dialog box containing details about this type of sensors, for example:

Trend plot:
The plot for each sensor has a different colour. You can change the settings for the
information to be displayed using the History settings ... and Range settings ...view
controls.

Used measurements:
For some of the sensor types (such as Wind, GPS speed, Doppler speed, Rotation speed,
Draught, Water depth, etc.) the value currently used by the system. is shown:

306 385575/D
Display views

Thruster forces view


The Thruster forces view shows the resultant thruster forces and the “real” location of
the thrusters.
To select the display view: place the cursor in the upper left corner of the working
area so that the drop-down list becomes visible. Click on the arrow and select the view
from the list.

These are the resultant thruster force and direction, and the resultant
turning moment and direction.

385575/D 307
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

These are numerical values and bar graphs showing the thruster force
for each thruster unit. The bar graphs show the percentage of the
maximum available thrust and are scaled individually. The numerical
values are all based on feedback signals from the thrusters.
The Status boxes show the Running, Ready and Enabled status of
each thruster unit.

Individual thrust vectors (thruster force feedback) for each thruster


are shown. The vectors change colour according to the change of
colour on the corresponding bar graphs (when passing limit values for
percentage of available thrust).

The resultant thruster force vector (displayed from the vessel's


Midships position) is displayed. A graphical indication of turning
moment is also shown. The turning moment has a maximum sector
range of ±180°.

The colour of the bars, the background colour of the values and the force vectors change
to yellow when the thrusters pass the limit for percentage of available thrust (typically
80%). This applies only in some modes (depending on your system configuration, but
usually in auto-modes). The colour changes to red when there is a signal error from
one of the thrusters. For example:

308 385575/D
Display views

Thruster main view


The thruster main view shows the performance and status of all the thrusters.
Bar graphs show the thruster force for each thruster unit. The thruster force for each
thruster unit and their resultant thruster force are also represented by vectors.
To select the display view: place the cursor in the upper left corner of the working
area so that the drop-down list becomes visible. Click on the arrow and select the view
from the list.
You can also press the THRUSTER button (THR) on the Operator panel.

385575/D 309
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

You can toggle the amount of information displayed on the view by clicking the Show
detail / Hide detail button.

Allocation mode:
This is the currently-selected thruster allocation mode (see
Thruster Allocation dialog box on page 186).
Priority shows either HDG (heading) or POS (position).
FreeRun shows either ON or OFF.
The Allocation mode area is click-sensitive. The ordinary
cursor changes to a pointing hand when positioned over this
area. Clicking the left trackball button opens up the Thruster
Allocation dialog box.

310 385575/D
Display views

The following information is presented:


• a numerical display of the resulting turning moment and
direction, a curved bar graph represents the value
• individual thrust vectors for each thruster
• a numerical display of the resulting force and direction, all
values are based on feedback signals from the thrusters

The colour of the force vectors change to yellow when the


thrusters pass the limit for percentage of available thrust
(typically 80%). This applies only in some modes (depending
on your system configuration, but usually auto-modes).

The colour of the force vectors change to red when there is a


signal error from one of the thrusters.

385575/D 311
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

When using the thruster force bias function, the thrusters are
colour-coded to identify the thruster bias groups.

These are numerical values and bar graphs showing the thruster
force for each thruster unit. The bar graphs show the percentage
of the maximum available thrust and are scaled individually.
The numerical values are all based on feedback signals from
the thrusters.
The Status boxes show the Running, Ready and Enabled status
of each thruster unit.

The colour of the bars and the background colour of the


values change to yellow when the thrusters pass the limit for
percentage of available thrust (typically 80%). This applies
only in some modes (depending on your system configuration,
but usually in auto-modes).

The colour of the bars and the background colour of the values
change to red when there is a signal error from one of the
thrusters.

312 385575/D
Display views

These are numerical and graphical displays of pitch/rpm and


power feedback for the tunnel thruster. The green label indicates
which system has control of the thrusters.

These are numerical and graphical displays of thruster azimuth


and pitch/rpm feedback for each azimuth thruster.
The force direction relative to the thruster is indicated by the
highlighted arrow. The green label indicates which system has
control of the thrusters.

The orange text FIX is displayed for thrusters that use fixed
angles. The green label indicates which system has control of
the thrusters.

These are numerical and graphical displays of propeller


pitch/rpm feedback.
A rudder symbol with numerical and graphical indication of
rudder angle is shown. Depending on the present mode, the
sector is defined by the maximum rudder angle or maximum
turn-angle for steering rudder/azimuth thruster.
The green labels indicate which system has control of the
thrusters.

For all thruster symbols:


• The colour of the bars changes to yellow when the thrusters pass the limit for
percentage of available thrust (typically 80%). This applies only in some modes
(depending on your system configuration, but usually in auto-modes).
• The colour of the bars changes to red when there is a signal error from one of the
propellers/rudders.

385575/D 313
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Thruster view — tunnel thruster


The Tunnel thruster view shows the operational state of a tunnel thruster.

A trend plot is displayed. You can select the information to be


displayed using the Thruster Sub Plot view control dialog box
(see Thruster Sub Plot view controls on page 315).

These are numerical and graphical displays of thruster pitch/rpm


and power feedback.

314 385575/D
Display views

This shows the thruster status:


Running
The thruster is running.
Ready
The thruster is available for control by the K-Pos DP system.
Enabled
The thruster is enabled for control by the K-Pos DP system.
This is the numerical value and a bar graph showing the thruster
force. The numerical value is based on a feedback signal
from the thruster. The bar graph shows the percentage of the
maximum available thrust. The setpoint force is indicated by
an orange line. The bar graph changes colour to red when the
thruster force exceeds the limit value for percentage of available
thrust (typically 80%).
This is a numerical display of the pitch, rpm and power setpoint
and feedback, and the difference between them, shown as a
percentage of the maximum.
The graphical display indicates the difference between the
setpoint and feedback (with zero at the centre of the scale).
The arrow changes colour to red to indicate an error.

By clicking on the left or right arrow (if present) you can display
the subview for the previous or next thruster unit. By clicking
on the up arrow, you can display the thruster main view.

Thruster Sub Plot view controls


To display the view control dialog box: right-click on the view →View control.
The Thruster Sub Plot view control dialog box is displayed.

Plot
The trend plot to be displayed. The following trend plots are available:
Thr Pitch
Pitch setpoint and feedback for this thruster.

385575/D 315
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Thr RPM
RPM setpoint and feedback for this thruster.
Thr Azim
Azimuth setpoint and feedback for this thruster.
Thr Load
Load setpoint and feedback for this thruster.
Time span
The time span for the trend plot.
Y axis Range...
Clicking this button displays the Y Axis Range dialog box which allows you to set
the upper and lower limits for the y-axis plot scale manually or to select automatic
scaling.

Auto
Selecting this option will set the Y-axis range automatically.
Manual
Allows you to set the Upper and Lower scale limits.

316 385575/D
Display views

Thruster view — azimuth thruster


The Azimuth thruster view shows the operational state of an azimuth thruster.

A trend plot is displayed. You can select the information to be


displayed using the Thruster Sub Plot view control dialog box
(see Thruster Sub Plot view controls on page 315).

These are numerical and graphical displays of thruster azimuth


and pitch/rpm feedback.
The shaded arcs indicate the forbidden zones.

385575/D 317
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

This shows the thruster status:


Running
The thruster is running.
Ready
The thruster is available for control by the K-Pos DP system.
Enabled
The thruster is enabled for control by the K-Pos DP system.

This is the numerical value and a bar graph showing the thruster
force. The numerical value is based on a feedback signal
from the thruster. The bar graph shows the percentage of the
maximum available thrust. The setpoint force is indicated by
an orange line. The bar graph changes colour to red when the
thruster force exceeds the limit value for percentage of available
thrust (typically 80%).

This is a numerical display of the pitch, rpm and azimuth


setpoint and feedback, and the difference between them, shown
as a percentage of the maximum.
The graphical display indicates the difference between the
setpoint and feedback (with zero at the centre of the scale).
The arrow changes colour to red to indicate an error.

By clicking on the left or right arrow (if present), you can


display the subview for the previous or next thruster unit. By
clicking on the up arrow, you can display the thruster main view.

Thruster Sub Plot view controls


To display the view control dialog box: right-click on the view →View control.
The Thruster Sub Plot view control dialog box is displayed.

318 385575/D
Display views

Plot
The trend plot to be displayed. The following trend plots are available:
Thr Pitch
Pitch setpoint and feedback for this thruster.
Thr RPM
RPM setpoint and feedback for this thruster.
Thr Azim
Azimuth setpoint and feedback for this thruster.
Thr Load
Load setpoint and feedback for this thruster.
Time span
The time span for the trend plot.
Y axis Range...
Clicking this button displays the Y Axis Range dialog box which allows you to set
the upper and lower limits for the y-axis plot scale manually or to select automatic
scaling.

Auto
Selecting this option will set the Y-axis range automatically.
Manual
Allows you to set the Upper and Lower scale limits.

385575/D 319
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Thruster view — propeller/rudder


The Propeller/rudder thruster view shows the operational state of a main propeller and, if
applicable, its associated rudder.

320 385575/D
Display views

A trend plot is shown. You can select the information to be


displayed using the Thruster Sub Plot view control dialog box
(see Thruster Sub Plot view controls on page 315).

Numerical and graphical displays of propeller pitch/rpm


feedback are shown.
Numerical and graphical displays of rudder azimuth feedback
are shown.
A rudder symbol with numerical and graphical indication of
rudder angle is shown. Depending on the present mode, the
sector is defined by the maximum rudder angle or maximum
turn-angle for steering rudder/azimuth thruster.

This shows the thruster status:


Running
The thruster is running.
Ready
The thruster is available for control by the K-Pos DP system.
Enabled
The thruster is enabled for control by the K-Pos DP system.

This is the numerical value and a bar graph showing the thruster
force. The numerical value is based on a feedback signal
from the thruster. The bar graph shows the percentage of the
maximum available thrust. The setpoint force is indicated by
an orange line. The bar graph changes colour to red when the
thruster force exceeds the limit value for percentage of available
thrust (typically 80%).

385575/D 321
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

This is a numerical display of the pitch, rpm and azimuth


setpoint and feedback, and the difference between them, shown
as a percentage of the maximum.
The graphical display indicates the difference between the
setpoint and feedback (with zero at the centre of the scale).
The arrow changes colour to red to indicate an error.
Note that only rpm and azimuth are configured in this example.

By clicking on the left or right arrow (if present) you can display
the subview for the previous or next thruster unit. By clicking
on the up arrow, you can display the thruster main view.

Thruster Sub Plot view controls


To display the view control dialog box: right-click on the view →View control.
The Thruster Sub Plot view control dialog box is displayed.

Plot
The trend plot to be displayed. The following trend plots are available:
Thr Pitch
Pitch setpoint and feedback for this thruster.
Thr RPM
RPM setpoint and feedback for this thruster.
Thr Azim
Azimuth setpoint and feedback for this thruster.
Thr Load
Load setpoint and feedback for this thruster.
Time span
The time span for the trend plot.

322 385575/D
Display views

Y axis Range...
Clicking this button displays the Y Axis Range dialog box which allows you to set
the upper and lower limits for the y-axis plot scale manually or to select automatic
scaling.

Auto
Selecting this option will set the Y-axis range automatically.
Manual
Allows you to set the Upper and Lower scale limits.

Thruster setpoint feedback view


The Thruster setpoint feedback view shows setpoint and feedback data for all the
thrusters.
To select the display view: place the cursor in the upper left corner of the working
area so that the drop-down list becomes visible. Click on the arrow and select the view
from the list.

385575/D 323
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Indicates the colour coding used on bar graphs and numerical


values for Setpoint, Feedback and the Difference between them.

This shows the thruster/propeller/rudder status:


Running
This is displayed only if the running status is available to the
K-Pos DP system.
Ready
Available for control by the K-Pos DP system.
Enabled
Enabled for control by the K-Pos DP system (see Enabling
thrusters on page 183).

324 385575/D
Display views

These are numerical and graphical displays of the thruster


azimuth or rudder angle setpoint and feedback, and the
difference between them (in degrees).

These are numerical displays and bar graphs of


the thruster load setpoint and feedback, and the
difference between them, shown as a percentage of
maximum.
These are numerical displays and bar graphs of
the pitch setpoint and feedback, and the difference
between them, shown as a percentage of maximum.

These are numerical displays and bar graphs of


the rpm setpoint and feedback, and the difference
between them, shown as a percentage of maximum.

These are numerical displays and bar graphs of


the force setpoint and feedback, and the difference
between them, shown as a percentage of maximum.

Trends view
The Trends view provides dynamic displays (trend plots) and numerical values for
trended curves showing the history over a specified period for selected information,
such as wind, sea current, position and heading deviation, thruster forces and power
consumption.
Using the Trend Plot view control dialog box (see Trend Plot view control on page 328)
you can select the trend plots to be displayed. Up to three different trend plots can be
displayed simultaneously.
To select the display view: place the cursor in the upper left corner of the working
area so that the drop-down list becomes visible. Click on the arrow and select the view
from the list.

385575/D 325
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

The header indicates the name of the variable type for which
you have selected to display the trend plot (see Trend Plot view
control on page 328 for selection of variable).

Depending on the type of variable you have selected, one or


several different trend curves will be displayed on the same
trend plot. Each curve will have its own specific name shown
together with a unique colour code.

326 385575/D
Display views

This is a trend plot for the selected variable using colour coding to identify and
differentiate the various variable curves being plotted. The plot has Time span along the
x-axis and measured values along the y-axis. You should note that the most recent values
are plotted to the far right, i.e. that the curves move from right to left on the trend plot.
Each trend plot has its own i button. Pressing this button
displays a Trend Numeric: dialog box.

The Trend Numeric: dialog box presents a range of numerical properties for all curves
on the trend plot. Values for the following numerical properties can be calculated and
displayed: Average, Minimum, Maximum and StdDev. The values for the numerical
properties are calculated over the Time Span over which you have selected to display the
specific trend plot (see Trend Plot view control on page 328).
In addition to displaying the numerical properties for each curve, the Trend Numeric:
dialog box contains a lead text column (Item) and a Unit column.
The width of the columns and the dialog box itself can be re-sized in several different
ways as follows:
• By placing the cursor on the delimiters of the column headers and clicking the left
trackball button. The cursor will then change shape to a two-headed arrow. You can
now drag the cursor to change the column width.

385575/D 327
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Note
This will not re-size the total width of the dialog box itself.

• By placing the cursor on top of a column or column header and then click the right
trackball button. A shortcut menu is then displayed.

Using the commands available on this menu, you can:


• Hide the column you are pointing at (Hide Column command), with the exception
of the Item column. Using this command you will be able to hide one or several
columns, thus obtaining a more compact dialog box showing only the numerical
properties you are interested in.
• Show all the columns on the dialog box (Show All Columns command) using the
default values for column widths.
• Adjust the width of each column according to the width of each single column header
(Width by Header command).
• Adjust the width of each column according to the width of the contents of each single
column (Width by Contents command).
• Save the column definition (i.e. the re-sized dialog box) for later use (Save command).
Next time you open the dialog box, it will be displayed using the last-saved column
definition.
Note
The Trend Numeric: dialog box will be re-sized according to the changed column
widths.

Trend Plot view control


To display the view control dialog box: right-click on the view →View control.

328 385575/D
Display views

Plot
The trend plots to be displayed. Clicking the down arrow on the far right of the Plot
list box opens up a list from which you can select the variable type to be displayed.
Time span
The time span for the trend plots.
Range...
Clicking this button displays the Y-Axis Range dialog box which allows you to
select automatic scaling or to manually set the upper and lower limits for the
y-axis plot scale.

Auto
Selecting this option will set the Y-axis range automatically.
Manual
Allows you to set the Upper and Lower scale limits manually.

385575/D 329
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

Index
A C detailed views
Diesel view, 259
About (dialog box) calibrating
LTW view, 265
Details, 218 joystick, 77
dialog boxes, 44
EXE/DLL, 217 Change Heading (button), 179
Diesel view, 259
Overview, 217 Change User (dialog box), 55
display
Acceleration/Deceleration changing user, 55
colours, 62
Settings (dialog box), Clutch Settings (dialog
layout, 29, 32, 44
173, 181 box), 206
printing a hardcopy, 56
Ack (button), 86 combinator control of
selection of display
Activate (button), 27, 178 thrusters, 204
palette, 62
alarm command
side bar, 44
acknowledging, 86 groups, 96
top bar, 32
lamps, 87 status, 96
working area, 44
silence, 87 transfer, 95
display accuracy
alarm limits Command Control (dialog
sea current speed, 61
heading, 63 box), 96
vessel speed, 61
pitch, roll, heave, 64 DP-OS, 97
display layout
position, 63 Give, 99
alarm presentation, 33
VRS, 64 Overview, 98
command control, 33
Alarm Limits (dialog box) command control indicator
system status, 33
Position, 63 on top bar, 33
display presentation
VRS, 64 Connect (dialog box), 102
wind, waves and sea
alarm message, 80 consequence analysis
current direction, 61
alarm presentation, 33 DP, 256
display views, 49
alarm states, 85 running state messages, 257
control dialog boxes, 51
Alarm View (button), 81 selecting DP class, 257
Joystick view, 261
Alarms (button) warning messages, 258
Numeric view, 270
Alarm lamp, 87 Control Setup (button), 65
orientation of the
Fault lamp, 87 controller
operator station, 49
Power lamp, 87 gain, 65
Posplot view, 273
Alarms (menu) in operation type PM, 22
Power Consumption
Position and Heading, 63 Controller mode
view, 291
VRS, 64 High Precision, 66
Power view, 285
Alloc Setup (button), 186 Relaxed, 66
preselecting, 52
Allocation Settings (dialog controller PS
Reference system main
box), 189 resetting, 103
view, 292
analysis selecting master, 107
Reference system status, 301
consequence updating offline, 107
Rotation Centers view, 303
DP, 256 Controls (button), 25
selecting, 50
Auto Position mode, 163 coordinate systems, 145
Sensors view, 303
from Joystick mode to, 163 position presentation, 129
Thruster forces view, 307
Green control, 21 system datum, 146
Thruster main view, 309
Automatic Thruster Start current
Thruster setpoint
(dialog box), 185 direction display, 61
feedback view, 323
AutoPos (menu) current update, 73
Thruster views
Acceleration, 181 Azimuth thruster
axis control, 40 view, 317
D
Propeller/rudder
damping, 40 view, 320
B dashboard, 35 Tunnel thruster view, 314
basic forces and motions, 15 Date And Time (dialog tooltip, hotspot cursor
blackout prevention, 208 box), 84 and change of cursor
Datum Details (dialog image, 49
box), 132 Trends view, 325
Decrease (button), 27, 178

330 385575/D
Index

zooming, 52 giving command, 95 calibrating, 77


divergence test of position GPS current update, 73
measurements, 149 quality filter, 144 electrical failure, 159
DP Class (dialog box), 257 Green control, 21 environmental
DpPS, 219 Gyro (button), 111, 113 compensation, 73
dpresentation units Gyro Deviation (dialog precision, 73
editing, 60 box), 115 thrust, 73
draught gyrocompasses, 111 Joystick (button), 158
sensors, 125 deviation calculation, 115 Joystick (menu)
Driver Properties (dialog faulty, 114 Acceleration, 181
box), 247 status lamp, 113 Joystick Calibrate (dialog
dropout box), 77
heading, 114 joystick control
position, 154 H position and heading, 158
hardcopy, 56 rotation center, 75
Hardcopy (button), 56 Joystick Full Thrust
E hardware information, 216 (button), 74
EBL (button), 277 heading Joystick mode, 157
EBL (dialog box), 284 changing using the with auto heading
EBL function, 284 heading wheel, 178 control, 159
electrical failure changing using the with auto position
joystick, 159 Posplot view, 177 control, 160
Electronic Bearing Line, 284 limits, 63 with automatic
emergency message, 80 operator selected, 180 stabilisation, 161
Enter a New Numeric rate of turn, 181 Joystick pane, 37
Value (dialog box), 47 stopping a change of Joystick Settings (dialog
entering numeric values, 45 heading, 176 box), 73
environmental system selected, 180 Joystick Setup (button), 73
compensation, 73 Heading (dialog box) Joystick view, 261
Equipment - System Status Heading, 179
(dialog box ) Rate Of Turn, 181
Event Printer, 227 Heading pane, 40 K
Net Status, 228 Heading Setpoint (dialog keypad, 26
OS/HS, 226 box), 178
PS, 224 Heading Wheel, 27, 178
PS Redundancy, 225 heave, 15 L
equipment status, 223 heave limits, 64 lamps
Event List view, 81 Help (menu) dimming, 57
Event Printer (dialog box), 88 Messages, 89 test, 58
export log files dialog box, 216 High Precision controller Light Taut Wire Plot
mode, 66 (dialog box), 269
hotspot, 49 limits
F heading, 63
free run pitch, roll, heave, 64
in Auto Track (high I position, 63
speed) and Autopilot Increase (button), 27, 178 VRS, 64
modes, 189 information message, 80 Local N/E Properties
freeze test of position input validation of entered (dialog box), 133
measurements, 148 values, 48 logging, 216
function keys, 26 IO Manager (dialog box), 232 logon configuration, 93
IO Point Browser (dialog Logon Configuration
box), 244 (dialog box), 93
G IO system, 221 LTW view, 265
gain, 65 IO Terminal Block (dialog view controls, 269
customised, 67 box), 239
high/medium/low, 67
Gain (dialog box), 65 M
general inforamtion, 49 J master controller PS
Give (button), 95 joystick, 27 selecting, 107

385575/D 331
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

median test of position changing using the Power Consumption view, 291
measurements, 150 Posplot view, 166 Power Optimal Allocation
messages dropout, 154 (dialog box), 192
acknowledging, 86 limits, 63 Power Plot (dialog box), 290
explanations, 89 speed setpoint, 171 Power view, 285
presentation, 81 stopping a change of view controls, 290
printed, 88 position, 165 prediction test of position
minimum power heading, 179 Position (dialog box) measurements, 149
mixed joystick/auto modes, 159 Abs, 170 Preselect (dialog box), 52
modes Inc, 168 Preselect button names
Auto Position, 163 R/B, 169 (dialog box), 52
button group, 25 Speed, 171 Present Heading (button), 176
Joystick, 157 Position deviation pane, 38 presentation
mixed joystick/auto, 159 Position Inc (dialog box), 167 resetting, 62
Standby, 156 Position Presentation Presentation Units
(dialog box), 129 selecting the set of
Position R/B (dialog box), 167 presentation units, 59
N position-reference systems Presentation Units (dialog
numbers changing relative box), 59
entering, 45 weight, 140 Print (dialog box), 229
input validation, 48 changing test limits, 141 Print Status (dialog box), 213
Numeric Entry Keypad changing the reference printing
Dialog Use (dialog box), 46 origin, 154 display picture, 56
Numeric view, 270 controlling, 135 System report, 57
coordinate systems, 145 process stations, 220
divergence test, 149 resetting, 103
O enabling, 139 PUIF Network message
enabling other, 153 monitoring (dialog box), 87
offline controller PS
enabling the first, 152
updating, 107
freeze test, 148
operator panel, 24 Q
median test, 150
operator station, 23
monitoring, 139 Quick Model (dialog box), 69
software restart, 92
prediction test, 149 quick model update, 68
software stop, 92
properties, 142
operator stations, 220
reference origin, 146, 152
relative weighting of, 148 R
P standard deviation, 147
tests on, 147 rate of turn
panel, 24 variance test, 148 acceleration/deceleration
Panel Lamp Test (dialog Positioning (menu) factor, 181
box), 58 Heading, 179 sensors, 126
Panel Light Configuration Position, 168 setpoint, 181
(dialog box), 57 Position Inc, 167 RBUS IO Image, 235
panning function (center Position R/B, 167 redundancy, 220
here), 284 Posplot (dialog box) dual-redundant systems, 105
PcAnywhere Waiting... Grid, 281 triple-redundant
(dialog box), 213 Motion, 280 systems, 106
pitch, 15 Range, 282 Redundant Stations (dialog
pitch limits, 64 Show, 280 box), 107
pitch, roll, heave Trace, 282 reference origin, 146
limits, 64 Posplot view, 273, 280 changing, 154
position changing heading, 177 Reference System (dialog
changing using absolute changing position, 166 box)
coordinates, 170 EBL function, 284 Enable, 139
changing using view controls, 280 Reference system main
increments, 167–168 power view, 292
changing using monitoring, 208 view controls, 298
range/bearing, 167,
169

332 385575/D
Index

Reference System Reference System Reset Controller PS, 103


Properties (dialog box), 142 Settings, 136 Screen Capture Printer, 56
Quality Filter Actions, 144 Speed, 122 Set Date/Time, 62
Reference System Settings VRS, 120 Stop/Restart, 92
(dialog box), 136 Wind, 116 system architecture, 219
Reference system status Sensors view, 303 system messages
view, 301 serial lines acknowledging, 86
Refsys (dialog box) resetting, 250 messages on the printer, 88
Grid, 299 Set System Date/Time presentation, 81
Mode, 298 (dialog box), 62 System report, 57
Range, 300 Settings (menu) system start-up, 92–93
Relaxed controller mode, 66 Dp Class, 257 system status, 33, 213
Remote Diagnostics Gain, 65
(dialog box), 211 Joystick, 73
Reset Controller PS (dialog Quick Model, 69 T
box), 103 Rate of Turn, 181 Take (button), 95
resetting presentation, 62 Rotation Center, 70 taking command, 95
roll, 15 Speed, 172 thrust
roll limits, 64 shell configuration, 93 joystick, 73
rotation center showing the tooltip, 49 Thruster (menu)
automatic heading side bar, 44 Allocation Mode, 186
control, 70 signal conditioning, 242 Allocation Settings, 189
joystick heading control, 75 Silence (button), 26, 58, 87 Automatic Start, 185
Rotation Center (dialog slow-drift test, 149 Biasing, 193
box), 70 software information, 216 Clutch Settings, 206
automatic control, 70 speed Combinator Control
Rotation Centers view, 303 acceleration/deceleration Settings, 204
rotation speed, 181 factor, 173 Enable, 184
display accuracy, 61 Power Optimal
sensors, 122 Allocation, 192
S setpoint Run-in, 205
satellite navigation changing, 171–172 Thruster Allocation (dialog
quality filter, 144 Speed Setpoint (dialog box), 186
sea current speed box), 172 Thruster Biasing (dialog)
display accuracy, 61 standard deviation of automatic bias, 195
sensors position measurements, 147 enter bias manually, 194
gyro deviation, 115 Standby (button), 157 Thruster Combinator
gyrocompass, 111 Standby mode, 156 Control Settings (dialog
VRS, 120 startup procedure, 92–93 box), 204
wind, 116 Status (button), 96 Thruster Enable (dialog
manually enter values, 118 status page, printing, 213 box), 184
Sensors — Wind (dialog Stop/Restart (dialog box), 92 Thruster forces view, 307
box), 116 stopping a change of Thruster main view, 309
Sensors (button), 26 heading, 176 Thruster Run-in (dialog
Sensors (dialog box) stopping a change of box), 205
Draught, 125 position, 165 Thruster setpoint feedback
Gyro, 111 surge, 15 view, 323
Rate Of Turn, 126 Surge (button), 25, 159 Thruster Sub Plot (dialog
Speed, 122 sway, 15 box), 315, 319, 322
Sensors (menu) Sway (button), 25, 159 Thruster views
Draught, 125 System (menu) Azimuth thruster view, 317
Gyro, 111 About, 216 Propeller/rudder view, 320
Gyro Deviation, 115 Connect, 102 Tunnel thruster view, 314
Rate Of Turn, 126 Equipment, 223 view controls, 315, 318, 322
Reference System, 139 Event Printer, 88 thrusters
Reference System Print Status, 213 allocation, 22
Properties, 142 Redundant Stations, 107 allocation modes, 186
diving, 188

385575/D 333
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

environ fix, 188 Use Preselected, 52


fix, 188 Views (button), 25
heave red, 188 VRS, 120
steering, 188 faulty, 122
variable, 187 status lamp, 121
automatic start, 185 VRS (button), 121
biasing, 193
angle factor, 201
inwards, 202 W
turn factor, 200 warning limits
clutch settings, 206 heading, 63
combinator control, 204 pitch, roll, heave, 64
control modes, 186 position, 63
enabling, 183 VRS, 64
force bias, 193 warning message, 80
manual fix angles, 189 explanations, 89
rudder limits, 189 wave
run-in, 205 direction display, 61
Thrusters (button), 25 wind
views, 309 direction display, 61
Tools (menu) sensors, 116
Calibrate, 77 faulty, 118
Numeric Entry Dialog, 46 manually enter values, 118
Remote Diagnostics, 211 status lamp, 118
System report, 57 Wind (button), 118
Trainer, 253 wind sensors
tooltip, 49 operating without, 120
top bar, 32 WinPS, 221
alarm presentation, 33 working area, 44
command control, 33
system status, 33
trackball, 27 Y
trainer, 253
Trainer Settings (dialog Y-Axis Range (dialog box)
box), 253 Power Plot, 290, 298, 329
Trend Numeric: (dialog Thruster Sub Plot, 316,
box), 327 319, 323
Trend Plot (dialog box), 328 yaw, 15
Trends view, 325 Yaw (button), 25, 159
view controls, 328

U
UTM Properties (dialog
box), 134

V
variance test of position
measurements, 148
vertical reference sensor, 120
vessel speed
display accuracy, 61
Vessel speed pane, 35
View (menu)
Position Presentation, 129
Preselect, 52
Presentation Units, 59

334 385575/D
Kongsberg K-Pos DP (OS)

335 385575/D
©2015 Kongsberg Maritime

You might also like